Fujitsu Universal Remote IRMC S2/S3 User guide

User Guide - English
ServerView Suite
Remote Management
iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management Controller
Edition July 2012
Comments… Suggestions… Corrections…
The User Documentation Department would like to
know your opinion of this manual. Your feedback helps
us optimize our documentation to suit your individual
needs.
Feel free to send us your comments by e-mail to
[email protected].
Certified documentation
according to DIN EN ISO 9001:2008
To ensure a consistently high quality standard and
user-friendliness, this documentation was created to
meet the regulations of a quality management system
which complies with the requirements of the standard
DIN EN ISO 9001:2008.
cognitas. Gesellschaft für Technik-Dokumentation mbH
www.cognitas.de
Copyright and Trademarks
Copyright © 2012 Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH.
All rights reserved.
Delivery subject to availability; right of technical modifications reserved.
All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
Contents
1
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1
Purpose and target groups of the manual . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3 (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3
Communication interfaces of the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . 19
1.4
Communication protocols used by the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . 20
1.5
IPMI - technical background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.6
DCMI (Data Center Management Interface)
1.7
Changes since the previous versions of the manual . . . . 30
1.8
ServerView Suite link collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.9
Documentation for ServerView Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.10
Notational conventions
2
Logging on to the iRMC S2/S3 for the first time . . . . . . . 37
2.1
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.2
iRMC S2/S3 factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface . . . . . . . . . 39
3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
3.1.1.2
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connected to the correct LAN port? . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC S2/S3
and the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access from a different subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the LAN interface: Configuration tools . . . . . .
Configuring the LAN interface using the BIOS / TrustedCore /
UEFI setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2 by using
the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1.3
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
iRMC S2/S3
. . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
. 41
. 42
. 42
. 43
. 43
. 43
. 44
. 44
Contents
3.1.3.2
3.1.4
3.2
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S3 by using
the UEFI setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Testing the LAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuring text console redirection via LAN using the
BIOS / TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S2 . . . . . .
Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S3 . . . . . .
Using console redirection while the operating system is running
.
.
.
.
48
49
53
55
Configuring and using the serial interface of the
iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the serial interface of the iRMC S2 . . .
Configuring the serial interface using of the iRMC S3
Using the Remote Manager (Serial) interface . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57
58
60
62
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 over the iRMC S2/S3
web interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the LAN parameters . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring text console redirection . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63
63
64
64
4
User management for the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.1
User management concept for the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . 66
4.2
User permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.3.2
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . .
Local user management using the iRMC S2/S3 web interface .
Local user management via the Server Configuration Manager
SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S2/S3 users . . . .
reating public and private SSHv2 keys . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC S2/S3
from a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring PuTTY and the OpenSSH client for using
the public SSHv2 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: Public SSHv2 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
4.3.3.3
4.3.3.4
.
.
.
.
.
70
70
71
72
73
. 77
. 79
. 84
iRMC S2/S3
Contents
5
Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.1
Requirements: Check the AVR settings
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.5.1
5.2.5.2
Using AVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a low bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel AVR sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Monitor Off" function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redirecting the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redirecting the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . .
Managed Windows server: Adjusting the settings for
synchronization of the mouse pointers . . . . . . .
Managed Linux server: Adjusting the settings for
synchronization of the mouse pointers . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
Menus of the AVR window
Extras menu . . . . . . . .
Remote Storage menu . . .
Power Control menu . . . .
Languages menu . . . . .
Preferences menu . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
Remote Storage
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
Starting Remote Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Provision of storage media for emote Storage . . . . . .
Connecting storage media as remote storage . . . . . .
Clearing Remote Storage connections . . . . . . . . .
Removing the storage medium . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
113
114
117
121
125
126
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server .
Installing the Remote Storage server . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Storage server execution modes . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring, starting and exiting the Remote Storage server
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127
128
129
130
7
iRMC S2/S3 web interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.1
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface . . . . . . . . . 136
7.2
Required user permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.2.5.3
iRMC S2/S3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . 86
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
88
89
89
90
91
93
93
. . . . 95
. . . . 98
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
101
102
105
106
107
108
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
7.3
Structure of the user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
System Information - Information on the server . . . . . . . 146
System Overview - General information on the server . . . . . 147
System Component Information - Information on the server
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.5
7.5.1
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS . .
Backup/Restoration - Saving/Restoring BIOS single parameter
settings to/from a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backing up single BIOS parameters in
ServerView® WinSCU XML format . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring single BIOS parameters in
ServerView® WinSCU XML format . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BIOS - Updating BIOS via "upload from file" or via TFTP . . .
7.5.1.1
7.5.1.2
7.5.2
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates . . .
iRMC S2/S3 Information - Information on the iRMC S2/S3 . .
Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings Save firmware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificate Upload - Load the DSA/RSA certificate and
private DSA/RSA key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate a self-signed Certificate -Generate self-signed RSA
certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
155
156
157
159
. 164
. 165
. 169
. 172
. 179
. 181
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Power On/Off - power the server up/down . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Power Options - Configuring power management for the server 191
Power Supply Info - Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
7.8
7.8.1
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Consumption Configuration - Configure power
consumption of the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Power Consumption - Show the current power
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Consumption History - Show server power consumption
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.9.3
7.9.4
Sensors - Check status of the sensors . . . . .
Fans - Check fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature - Report the temperature of the server
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltages - Report voltage sensor information . . . .
Power Supply - Check power supply . . . . . . . .
199
200
206
207
. . . . . . 211
. . . . . . 212
. . . . . . 215
. . . . . . 217
. . . . . . 218
iRMC S2/S3
Contents
7.9.5
Component Status - Check status of the server components . . 220
7.10
7.10.1
System Event Log and Internal Event Log . . .
System Event Log Content Show information on the SEL and the SEL entries
Internal Event Log Content Show information on the internal eventlog and the
associated entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Log Configuration - Configure IPMI SEL and
internal event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2
7.10.3
. . . . . . . 223
. . . . . . . 224
. . . . . . . 227
. . . . . . . 230
7.11
Server Management Information - Configuring the server
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
7.12
7.12.1
7.12.3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters . .
Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . .
Ports and Network Services Configuring ports and network services . . . . . . . . . .
DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC S2/S3
. . . 245
. . . 249
7.13
7.13.1
7.13.2
7.13.3
Alerting - Configure alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Trap Alerting - Configure SNMP trap alerting . .
Serial / Modem Alerting - Configure alerting via modem
Email Alerting - Configure email alerting . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
7.14
7.14.1
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iRMC S2/S3 User - local user management on
the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New User Configuration - Configuring a new user . . . . .
User “<name>” Configuration - User configuration (details)
Directory Service Configuration (LDAP) Configuring the directory service at the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . .
Configuring iRMC S2/S3 for Microsoft Active Directory . .
Configuring iRMC S2/S3 for Novell eDirectory /
OpenLDAP / OpenDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration Configuring the CAS Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.12.2
7.14.1.1
7.14.1.2
7.14.2
7.14.2.1
7.14.2.2
7.14.3
7.15
7.15.1
.
.
.
.
. . . 238
. . . 239
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
253
254
255
257
. 263
. 263
. 265
. 266
. 273
. 276
. 280
. 286
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console . . . . . . . 292
BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.15.1.1
BIOS Console Redirection Options Configure text console redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
iRMC S2/S3
Contents
7.15.1.2
Text Console Redirection (via Serial over LAN) Start text console redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.15.1.3
Text console redirection while the operating system
is running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.15.2
Advanced Video Redirection Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.16
Remote Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.17
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
8
iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager) . . . . . . . 321
8.1
Requirements on the managed server . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.2
Operating Remote Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.3
Overview of menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.4
Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.5
Main menu of the Remote Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.6
Required user permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.7
Change the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
8.8
System Information - Information on the managed server . 332
8.9
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
8.10
Enclosure Information - System event log and status
of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
8.11
Service processor - IP parameters, identification LED and
iRMC S2/S3 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
8.12
Console Redirection (EMS/SAC) - Start text console
redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
8.13
Start a Command Line shell... - Start a SMASH CLP shell . 340
8.14
Console Logging - Redirect message output to
the text console (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
8.15
Command Line Protocol (CLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
315
iRMC S2/S3
Contents
9
Configuring iRMC S2/S3 using the Server Configuration
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
9.1
Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the
ServerView Installation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
9.2
Calling the Server Configuration Manager from the
Windows Start menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
9.3
alling the Server Configuration Manager from the
Operations Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
10
Firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
10.1
iRMC S2/S3 firmware (overview)
10.2
Setting up the USB memory stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
Updating firmware images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update via the iRMC S2/S3 web interface . . . . . . . . .
Update using the ServerView Update Manager . . . . . .
Online update using ServerView Update Manager Express
or ASP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update using the operating system flash tools. . . . . . .
Update via the lashDisk menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4
Emergency flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10.5
Flash tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
11
Remote installation of the operating system via
iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
11.1
Installing the operating system via iRMC S2/S3 - general
procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
11.2
Connecting a storage medium as remote storage . . . . . . 374
11.3
Booting the managed server from ServerView Suite DVD 1
and configuring it with the Installation Manager . . . . . . . 377
11.4
Installing the operating system on the managed server
after configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Installing Windows on the managed server after configuration . 380
Installing Linux on the managed server after configuration . . . 383
11.4.1
11.4.2
iRMC S2/S3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
. . . 360
. . . 360
. . . 361
. . . 362
. . . 363
. . . 365
Contents
12
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
12.1
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2
Description of the IPMI OEM commands . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.1
Description format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.2
SCCI-compliant Power On/Off commands . . . . .
12.1.2.3
SCCI-compliant communication commands . . . .
12.1.2.4
SCCI-compliant signaling command . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.5
Firmware-specific commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.6
BIOS-specific commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2.7
iRMC S2/S3-specific commands . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
12.2.1
12.2.1.1
12.2.1.2
12.2.1.3
12.2.1.4
12.2.2
12.2.2.1
12.2.2.2
12.2.2.3
12.2.2.4
12.2.2.5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iRMC S2/S3 configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCI file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting / importing configuration data from / on the
iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scripted configuration of the iRMC S2/S3 . . . . . . . . .
List of SCCI commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3 .
Scripting with cURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scripting with Visual Basic (VB) Script . . . . . . . . .
Scripting with Python . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD.exe
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
385
385
387
387
388
393
395
396
400
402
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
412
412
412
414
418
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
419
420
420
421
422
423
424
iRMC S2/S3
1
Preface
Modern server systems are becoming increasingly complex. The requirements
with respect to the management of such systems are growing accordingly.
In response to this development, a number of vendors founded the “Intelligent
Platform Management Interface” (IPMI) initiative with the objective of defining a
standardized, abstract, message-based interface between the central system
controller (Baseboard Management Controller - BMC) and intelligent hardware
for platform management. For further details on IPMI, please refer to section
"IPMI - technical background" on page 21.
The integrated Remote Management Controllers iRMC S2 and iRMC S3 (in the
following iRMC S2/S3 for short) each represent a BMC with integrated LAN
connection and extended functionality. In this way, the iRMC S2/S3 offers
comprehensive control over PRIMERGY servers, irrespective of the system
status. In particular, the iRMC S2/S3 allows for out-of-band management
(Lights Out Management, LOM) of PRIMERGY servers. Out-of-band
management uses of a dedicated management channel that enables a system
administrator to monitor and manage servers via remote control regardless of
whether the server is powered on.
Figure 1: iRMC S2 on the system board of a PRIMERGY server
iRMC S2/S3
11
Purpose and target groups of the manual
As an autonomous system on the system board of a modern PRIMERGY
server, the iRMC S2/S3 has its own operating system, its own web server,
separate user management and independent alert management. The
iRMC S2/S3 remains powered up even when the server is in stand-by mode.
This manual describes how to configure the iRMC S2/S3 and the various user
interfaces available.
1.1
Purpose and target groups of the manual
This manual is aimed at system administrators, network administrators, and
service staff who have a sound knowledge of hardware and software. It provides
basic information on the technology behind IPMI and deals with the following
aspects in detail:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Logging on to the iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3
User management on the iRMC S2/S3
Advanced Video Redirection via iRMC S2/S3
Remote Storage via iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 web interface
Telnet/SSH-based interface (Remote Manager) of the iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 with the Server Configuration Manager
Updating the firmware
Remote installation of the operating system via iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands
Service
If you have any further questions on remote management for PRIMERGY
servers, contact the service and support partners responsible for you.
Other information
http://www.ts.fujitsu.com
12
iRMC S2/S3
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3
1.2
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3 (overview)
The iRMC S2/S3 supports a wide range of functions that are provided by
default. With Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) and Remote Storage, the
iRMC S2/S3 also provides two additional advanced features for the remote
management of PRIMERGY servers. To use AVR and Remote Storage, you
require a valid license key, which can be purchased separately.
Standard functions of the iRMC S2/S3
●
Browser access
The iRMC S2/S3 features its own web server which can be accessed by the
management station from a standard web browser.
●
Security (SSL, SSH)
Secure access to the Web server and secure graphical console redirection
including mouse and keyboard can be provided over HTTPS/SSL. An
encrypted connection protected using SSH mechanisms can be set up to
access the iRMC S2/S3 using the Remote Manager. The Remote Manager
is an alphanumeric user interface for the iRMC S2/S3.
●
ServerView Integration
The ServerView agents detect the iRMC S2/S3 and automatically assign it
to the relevant server. This means that it is possible to start the iRMC S2/S3
web interface and text console redirection using the ServerView Remote
Management Frontend directly from ServerView Operations Manager.
●
Power management
Irrespective of the status of the system, you have the following options for
powering the managed server up or down from the remote workstation
– using the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
– using the Remote Manager and the command line interface (CLP)
– with a script.
iRMC S2/S3
13
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3
●
Power consumption control
The iRMC S2/S3 allows comprehensive power consumption control on the
managed server. In addition, you can specify the mode (minimum power
consumption or maximum performance) that the iRMC S2/S3 uses to control
power consumption on the managed server. You can switch between these
modes as required.
●
Customer Self Service (CSS)
Summary tables for the server components, sensors and the power supply
on the iRMC S2/S3 web interface provide information in a separate column
as to whether the server component affected is a CSS component or not. In
addition, error list of the system event log (SEL) shows for every event
whether it has been triggered by a CSS component.
●
Text console redirection
You can start a Telnet/SSH session to the iRMC S2/S3 from the ServerView
Remote Management Frontend. This calls the Remote Manager, via which
you can start a text console redirection session.
●
Basic functions of a BMC
The iRMC S2/S3 supports the basic functions of a BMC such as voltage
monitoring, event logging and recovery control.
●
“Headless” system operation
The managed server does not require a mouse, monitor or keyboard to be
connected. The benefits of this include lower costs, far simpler cabling in the
rack and increased security.
●
Identification LED
To facilitate identification of the system, for instance if it is installed in a fully
populated rack, you can activate the identification LED from the iRMC S2/S3
web interface.
●
Global error LED
A global error LED informs you of the status of the managed system at all
times and at the same time shows the CSS (Customer Self Service) status.
●
Power LED
The power LED informs you whether the server is currently switched on or
off.
14
iRMC S2/S3
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3
●
LAN
On some systems, the LAN interface of the fitted system NIC (Network
Interface Card) on the server is reserved for the management LAN. On other
systems, you have the option of configuring this LAN interface to
– reserve it for the management LAN
– set it up for shared operation with the system or
– make it completely available to the system.
The ports marked with a wrench symbol are assigned to the iRMC S2/S3
(see figure 7 on page 42).
●
Command line interface (CLP)
In addition to the Remote Manager, the iRMC S2/S3 also supports SMASH
CLP (System Management Architecture for Server Hardware Command
Line Protocol) as standardized by the DMTF (Distributed Management Task
Force).
●
Simple configuration - interactive or script-based
The following tools are available for configuring the iRMC S2/S3:
–
–
–
–
iRMC web interface
Server Configuration Manager
The server management tool IPMIVIEW
BIOS Setup
It is also possible to carry out configuration with the Server Configuration
Manager or IPMIVIEW using scripts. This means that it is possible to
configure the iRMC S2/S3 when the server is first configured via ServerView
Installation Manager. It is also possible to configure a large number of
servers on the basis of scripts.
●
Support for the LocalView service panel
If PRIMERGY servers are equipped with a ServerView local service panel,
this module allows you to determine what module is faulty and whether you
can replace the faulty module yourself.
●
Local user management
The iRMC S2/S3 has its own user management function which allows up to
16 users to be created with passwords and to be assigned various rights
depending on the user groups they belong to.
iRMC S2/S3
15
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3
●
Global user management using a directory service
The global user IDs for the iRMC S2/S3 are stored centrally in the directory
service's directory. This makes it possible to manage the user identifications
on a central server. They can therefore be used by all the iRMC S2/S3s that
are connected to this server in the network.
The following directory services are currently supported for iRMC S2/S3
user management:
–
–
–
–
●
Microsoft® Active Directory
Novell® eDirectory
OpenLDAP
OpenDS
CAS-based single sign-on (SSO) authentication
The iRMC S2/S3 supports Centralized Authentication Service (CAS)
configuration, which allows you to configure the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
for CAS-based single sign-on (SSO) authentication.
The first time a user logs in to an application (e.g. the iRMC S2/S3 web
interface) within the SSO domain of the CAS service, they are prompted for
their credentials by the CAS-specific login screen. Once they have been
successfully authenticated by the CAS service, the user is granted access
to the iRMC S2/S3 web interface as well as to any other service within the
SSO domain without being prompted for login credentials again.
●
DNS / DHCP
The iRMC S2/S3 provides support for automatic network configuration. It
has a default name and DHCP support is set by default so that the
iRMC S2/S3 gets its IP address from the DHCP server. The iRMC S2/S3
name is registered by the Domain Name Service (DNS). Up to five DNS
servers are supported. If DNS/DHCP is not available, the iRMC S2/S3 also
supports static IP addresses.
●
Power supply
The iRMC S2/S3 is powered by the standby supply of the system.
●
Alert management
The alert management facility of the iRMC S2/S3 provides the following
options for forwarding alerts (alerting):
– Platform Event Traps (PET) are sent via SNMP.
– Direct alerting by email.
16
iRMC S2/S3
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3
– A modem can be connected to the serial interface. This can then be used
to send alerts (e.g. to a mobile phone via SMS).
In addition, the iRMC S2/S3 provides the ServerView agents with all the
relevant information.
●
Read, filter and save the system event log (SEL).
You can view, save and delete the contents of the SEL
– by using the iRMC S2/S3 web interface or
– by using the Telnet/SSH-based interface (Remote Manager) of the
iRMC S2/S3.
●
Read, filter and save the internal event log (iEL).
You can view, save and delete the contents of the iEL
– by using the iRMC S2/S3 web interface or
– by using the Telnet/SSH-based interface (Remote Manager) of the
iRMC S2/S3.
Extended functionality of the iRMC S2/S3
Alongside the standard functionality, the iRMC S2/S3 also supports the
Advanced Video Redirection and Remote Storage functions.
●
Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)
The iRMC S2/S3 supports Advanced Video Redirection which offers the
following benefits:
– Operation over a standard web browser. No additional software needs to
be installed in the management station other than the Java Runtime
Environment.
– System-independent graphical and text console redirection (including
mouse and keyboard).
– Remote access for boot monitoring, BIOS administration and operation
of the operating system.
– AVR supports up to two simultaneous “virtual connections” for working
on a server from a different location. It also reduces the load on the
network by using hardware and video compression.
iRMC S2/S3
17
Functions of the iRMC S2/S3
– Local monitor-off support: It is possible to power down the local screen
of the managed PRIMERGY server during an AVR session in order to
prevent unauthorized persons from observing user input and actions
carried out on the local server screen during the AVR session.
– Low bandwidth
In the case of a reduced data transfer rate, you can configure a lower
bandwidth (bits per pixel, bpp) in terms of color depth for your current
AVR session.
●
Remote Storage
Remote Storage makes a “virtual” drive available which is physically located
on a remote workstation or made available centrally on the network using a
Remote Storage server.
The “virtual” drives available with Remote Storage are simply managed in
much the same way as local drives and offer the following options:
–
–
–
–
Read and write data.
Boot from Remote Storage.
Install drivers and small applications.
Update BIOS from remote workstation.
(BIOS update via USB)
Remote Storage supports the following device types to provide a “virtual
drive” on the remote workstation:
–
–
–
–
–
–
CD ROM
DVD ROM
Memory stick
Floppy image
CD ISO image
DVD ISO image
A Remote Storage server provides an ISO image centrally on the network in
the form of a “virtual drive”.
Remote Storage permits either the simultaneous connection of up to two
“virtual” drives at the remote workstation or the provision of an ISO image
via a Remote Storage server.
18
iRMC S2/S3
Communication interfaces of the iRMC S2/S3
1.3
Communication interfaces of the
iRMC S2/S3
The iRMC S2/S3 provides the following communication interfaces:
●
iRMC S2/S3 web interface (web interface)
The connection to the iRMC S2/S3 web server is established over a
standard web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox).
Among other things, the web interface of the iRMC S2/S3 provides you with
access to all system information and data from the sensors such as fan
speeds, voltages, etc. You can also configure text-based console redirection
and start graphical console redirection (Advanced Video Redirection, AVR).
In addition, administrators can fully configure the iRMC S2/S3 over the web
interface. Secure access to the iRMC S2/S3 web server can be provided
with HTTPS/SSL.
Operation of the iRMC S2/S3 over the web interface is described in chapter
"iRMC S2/S3 web interface" on page 135.
●
Remote Manager: Text-based Telnet/SSH interface via LAN
You can call the Remote Manager
– from the ServerView Remote Management Frontend,
– directly from a Telnet/SSH client.
The alphanumeric user interface of the Remote Manager provides you with
access to system and sensor information, power management functions and
the error event log. In addition, you can launch text console redirection or a
SMASH CLP shell. If you call the Remote Manager over SSH (Secure Shell),
the connection between the Remote Manager and the managed server is
encrypted.
Operation of the iRMC S2/S3 using the Remote Manager is described in
chapter "iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager)" on page 321.
●
Remote Manager (Serial): Text-based serial interface over Serial 1
The Remote Manager (serial) interface is identical to the Remote Manager
interface.
iRMC S2/S3
19
Communication protocols used by the iRMC S2/S3
1.4
Communication protocols used by the
iRMC S2/S3
The communication protocols and ports used by the iRMC S2/S3 are shown in
table 1.
Remote side of the
connection
Communication
direction
iRMC S2/S3 side of the connection
(port number / protocol)
→
623/UDP
←
623/UDP
→
80/TCP
←
80/TCP
→
443/TCP
←
443/TCP
→
3172/TCP
←
3172/TCP
→
22/TCP
←
22/TCP
Trap
→
162/UDP
Email
→
25/TCP
←
25/TCP
→
5901/TCP
←
5901/TCP
→
80/TCP
←
80/TCP
→
443/TCP
←
443/TCP
RMCP
HTTP port
HTTPs port
Telnet
SSH
Remote Storage
VNC ports
Standard port
Secure port
Table 1: Communication protocols and ports used by the iRMC S2/S3
I As of iRMC S2/S3 firmware version 5.00, the Remote Storage port is
used only for the Remote Storage server and client-internal
communications. For integrated Remote Storage (via the Java applet),
the http port is used.
20
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI - technical background
1.5
IPMI - technical background
The iRMC S2/S3 makes the BMC functions available over the IPMI interface.
Intelligent Platform Management
The “Intelligent Platform Management” initiative is a response to the increasing
complexity of modern server systems. A number of manufacturers have joined
this initiative in order to come up with a new solution for monitoring these server
systems.
The term “Intelligent Platform Management” expresses the core aspect of this
approach to the solution: Functions for monitoring and recovery of systems are
implemented directly in the hardware and firmware for platform management.
Objective
The objective was to define a standardized, abstract and message-based
interface between the central system controller (Baseboard Management
Controller - BMC) and intelligent platform management hardware.
The standardization committees combined the central characteristics of various
platform management modules into standardized descriptions.
Definition
The IPMI specification defines:
“IPMI is a hardware level interface specification that is ‘management
software neutral’ providing monitoring and control functions that can be
exposed through standard management software interfaces such as
DMI, WMI, CIM, SNMP, etc. As a hardware level interface, it sits at the
bottom of a typical management software stack” [see section "IPMI and
other management standards" on page 22].
iRMC S2/S3
21
IPMI - technical background
Advantage
The IPMI specifications ensure the independence of functions for inventory,
logging, recovery and monitoring of a system by the system processor, BIOS or
operating system.
This means that a system can still be involved in platform management when it
is shut down and turned off.
IPMI and other management standards
IPMI is best used in conjunction with system management software running
under the relevant operating system. Integration of the IPMI functionality into the
management functionality offered by a management application and the
operating system results in a powerful platform management environment.
An overview of the relationship between IPMI and the management software
stack is shown by figure 2:
Figure 2: IPMI in the management software stack (source: IPMI specification, see section
"References" on page 29)
22
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI - technical background
IPMI, IPMB and ICMB
The IPMI initiative resulted in three central standards:
– IPMI. Intelligent Platform Management Interface Specification
describes the higher-level architecture, the current commands, event
formats, data packets and properties that are used in IPMI-based systems.
– IPMB. Intelligent Platform Management Bus
is an I2C based (write only) bus, which provides a standardized connection
between various modules in a common housing.
IPMB can also be used as a standardized interface for remote management
modules.
– ICMB. Intelligent Chassis Management Bus
(Not currently implemented in the ServerView remote management
environment.)
provides a standardized interface for exchange of platform management
information and for control across systems. ICMB is designed in such a way
that it can be implemented with a device that is connected to the IPMB.
IPMI implementation
The core element of an IPMI implementation is the Baseboard Management
Controller (BMC).
The BMC performs the following tasks:
– The BMC organizes the interface between the system management
software and the platform management hardware.
– It provides autonomous functions for monitoring, event logging and recovery
control.
– The BMC acts as a gateway between the system management software and
IPMB.
IPMI allows platform management to be extended: Additional management
controllers can be connected via the IPMB. The IPMB is an I2C based serial
bus, which runs between the main modules of the system. It is used for
communication with and between the management controllers.
With the support of multiple management controllers, IPMI provides a scalable
architecture: A complex server system can use multiple controllers for
monitoring different subsystems, e.g. power supplies, hot swap RAID drive
modules etc.
iRMC S2/S3
23
IPMI - technical background
In addition, IPMI provides ‘low level’ I2C commands, which can be accessed via
a management controller connected to the IPMB on 'unintelligent' I2C modules
that cannot process IPMI commands.
An overview of the fundamental elements of an IPMI implementation is available
in figure 3 on page 25.
24
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI - technical background
Figure 3: IPMI block diagram (source: IPMI specification, see section
"References" on page 29)
iRMC S2/S3
25
IPMI - technical background
IPMI and “in band” and “out of band” management
In the field of system management, a distinction is made between “in-band” and
“out-of-band” management:
– The term “in-band” management is used when the operating system is
running on the managed server.
–
The term “out-of-band” management is used when the operating system is
not running on the managed server, for instance if the hardware is faulty.
As different interfaces are available in an environment with IPMI compatible
systems, you can manage IPMI compatible systems either “in band” or “out of
band”.
IPMI-over-LAN
“IPMI-over-LAN” is the current name for the specification of the LAN interface in
the IPMI standard. This specification stipulates how IPMI messages can be sent
to or from the BMC of a managed system - encapsulated in RMCP (Remote
Management Control Protocol) data packets. These RMCP data packets are
transferred via an Ethernet LAN connection using the UDP (User Datagram
Protocol) under IPv4 (Internet Protocol Version 4).
The RMCP protocol has been specified to support the management of system
statuses in which the operating system is not running. The RMCP is a simple
inquiry/response protocol.
The interface for such a connection is provided on an onboard LAN controller
assigned to the BMC.
I The interface can only be provided by an on-board LAN controller, not by
an inserted LAN card.
26
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI - technical background
Of the two ports that RCMP uses under UDP, the BMC communicates with the
LAN controller via port 623 (primary RMCP Port).
Figure 4: BMC and LAN controller
Serial Over LAN interface (SOL)
“Serial Over LAN” is an interface compliant with the IPMI V2.0 standard, which
controls transfer of serial data over a LAN connection. In particular, SOL
specifies the packet formats and protocols for transferring serial data streams
over a LAN between the serial controller on the managed computer and a
remote workstation. SOL is based on the IPMI-over-LAN specification.
In order to establish an SOL connection, a remote management application first
initiates an IPMI-over-LAN session with the BMC. After this has been done, the
SOL services can be activated from the remote workstation. The data traffic
between the serial controller and the remote workstation is handled over the
same IPMI session as the IPMI commands.
As soon as an SOL connection has been established, data transfer between the
serial controller and the remote workstation is carried out as follows:
– Transfer from the serial controller to the remote workstation:
The data stream issued by the serial controller is partitioned by the BMC,
packaged and then sent to the remote workstation over the LAN.
– Transfer from the remote workstation to the serial controller:
BMC unpacks the characters contained in the packages sent by the remote
workstation and forwards them to the serial controller as a character stream.
iRMC S2/S3
27
IPMI - technical background
Figure 5: BMC and SOL
The SOL character data is then exchanged between the BMC of the managed
system and the remote workstation as SOL messages. The SOL messages are
encapsulated in RMCP+ data packets and transferred in UDP datagrams over
an Ethernet LAN connection using IPv4 (Internet Protocol Version 4). The
RMCP+ protocol is based on the RMCP protocol, but includes extensions for
encryption, authentication, etc.
Serial over LAN permits “headless” management by console redirection by both
the BIOS and the operating system of the managed server. High-cost
concentrator solutions are not required.
Channel concept under IPMI
‘Channels’ provide the mechanisms with which IPMI messages are routed to
the BMC via various connection carriers. Up to nine channels can be supported.
The system interface and the primary IPMB are fixed. The other seven channels
are available for the implementation.
Channels can be either ‘session based’ or ‘sessionless’. The ‘session’ concept
has two meanings: It is either a concept for user authentication (see the section
"User identifications" on page 29) or a concept for routing multiple IPMI
message streams via a single channel.
Examples of ‘session based’ channels are LAN channels or serial / modem
channels. Examples of ‘sessionless’ channels are the system interface and the
IPMB.
28
iRMC S2/S3
Data Center Management Interface (DCMI)
User identifications
For ‘session based’ channels (see the section "Channel concept under IPMI" on
page 28), a user login is necessary. By contrast, the ‘sessionless’ channels
have no user authentication.
Under IPMI, the user configuration is channel specific. Thus, users can have
different privileges depending on whether they are accessing the BMC via the
LAN channel or the serial channel.
References
Information about the IPMI standards can be found on the Internet:
http://developer.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/index.htm
1.6
DCMI (Data Center Management Interface)
The iRMC S2/S3 supports the DCMI (Data Center Management Interface)
protocol, which is compliant with the IPMI V2.0 standard. DCMI has been
designed to improve manageability and energy efficiency of server systems that
are deployed in large data centers.
To meet the hardware management requirements of servers within data
centers, DCMI supports, among others, the following key features:
–
–
–
–
–
Inventory functions (server identification)
Power Management and power monitoring
Power consumption monitoring and control
Event logging
Temperature monitoring
Detailed information about DCMI can be found on the DCMI home page:
http://www.intel.com/technology/product/DCMI
iRMC S2/S3
29
Changes compared with the previous version
1.7
Changes since the previous versions of the
manual
iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management Controller
(edition July 2012)
This manual refers to the iRMC S2/S3 firmware version 6.5x and replaces the
following online manual: “iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management
Controller”, May 2012 edition.
The manual includes the following updates:
●
The "0 Watt Technology" feature is described in Chapter "7 iRMC S2/S3 web
interface".
●
The former chapter "12 IPMI OEM Commands" has been expanded and is
now an Appendix ("12 Appendix") to the manual, containing the following
sections:
– "12.1 IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3" (former
chapter "12 IPMI OEM Commands")
– "12.2 Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration"
(new section).
iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management Controller
(edition May 2012)
This manual refers to the iRMC S2/S3 firmware version 6.5x and replaces the
following online manual: “iRMC S2 - integrated Remote Management
Controller”, November 2011 edition.
New iRMC S2/S3 features (described in Chapter "7 iRMC S2/S3 web
interface"):
●
Agentless HDD monitoring (iRMC S3 only)
If the managed server supports the "agentless HDD monitoring" feature, the
HDD<n> status of each individual HDD is directly read and reported to the
iRMC S2/S3 via a dedicated lightpath status sensor and thus can be
displayed even in the case no ServerView agents are running.
●
Backing up/restoring BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
If the BIOS of the managed server meets the corresponding feature
requirements, the iRMC S2/S3 allows you to perform the following actions:
30
iRMC S2/S3
Changes compared with the previous version
– Backing up several BIOS parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML
format and restoring them in ServerView® WinSCU XML format from a
file.
– Updating BIOS via "upload from file" or via TFTP.
●
For some server types, you can select the Low Noise mode under
Power Consumption Options (iRMC S3 only).
iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management Controller
(edition November 2011)
This manual refers to the iRMC S2/S3 firmware version 5.5x and replaces the
following online manual: “iRMC S2 - integrated Remote Management
Controller”, May 2011 edition.
The following topics are no longer part of this manual:
– Former section "4.4 Global user management for the iRMC S2/S3". As of
SVOM V5.50, this section will be integrated in the "User Management in
ServerView" manual.
– Description of the Server Configuration Manager dialog pages (former
sections 9.2 and the following). Instead, the reader is advised to use the
Online Help of the Server Configuration Manager.
iRMC S2/S3 - integrated Remote Management Controller
(edition May 2011)
This manual refers to the iRMC S2/S3 firmware version 5.5x and replaces the
following online manual: “iRMC S2 - integrated Remote Management
Controller”, April 2011 edition.
The manual applies to both iRMC S2 and iRMC S3. Functional differences in
between the iRMC S2 and the iRMC S3 are pointed out separately in the
manual.
iRMC S2 - integrated Remote Management Controller (edition April 2011)
The April 2011 edition of the iRMC S2 manual refers to the iRMC S2 firmware
version 5.5x and replaces the following online manual: “iRMC S2 - integrated
Remote Management Controller”, July 2010 edition.
●
New iRMC S2 features:
iRMC S2/S3
31
Changes compared with the previous version
– In addition to the system event log (IPMI SEL), the iRMC S2 now features
an internal event log.
– The iRMC S2 now supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
– The iRMC S2 now supports the Open DS directory service.
– iRMC S2 Configuration (iRMC S2 firmware settings) can be restored via
the iRMC S2 web interface.
– Email alerting is now also supported for global iRMCS2 user IDs.
●
Chapter "5 Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)":
In addition to some minor changes, the menu of the AVR window has been
supplemented with the Power Control entry, allowing you now to power on /
power down / reboot the server directly from the AVR window.
●
Chapter "7 iRMC S2 web interface":
– Power Supply page: The Power Supply Redundancy Configuration feature is
available for some server types.
– System Event Log Content page:
GUI language "German":
Event description and resolutions are described in German.
GUI language "Japanese":
Resolutions are described in Japanese.
– The DNS Configuration page now additionally includes the functionality of
the former DHCP configuration page, which is no longer available.
– New / modified pages corresponding to the new iRMC S2 features
mentioned above.
●
Chapter "8 Remote Manager":
New / modified menus corresponding to the new iRMC S2 features internal
event log and IPv6 addressing.
●
Chapter "9 Server Configuration Manager":
New / modified menu pages corresponding to the new iRMC S2 features
IPv6 addressing and Open DS support.
32
iRMC S2/S3
Changes compared with the previous version
1.8
ServerView Suite link collection
Via the link collection, Fujitsu Technology Solutions provides you with numerous
downloads and further information on the ServerView Suite and PRIMERGY
servers.
For ServerView Suite, links are offered on the following topics:
●
Forum
●
Service Desk
●
Manuals
●
Product information
●
Security information
●
Software downloads
●
Training
I The downloads include the following:
– Current software versions for the ServerView Suite as well as
additional Readme files.
– Information files and update sets for system software components
(BIOS, firmware, drivers, ServerView agents and ServerView update
agents) for updating the PRIMERGY servers via ServerView Update
Manager or for locally updating individual servers via ServerView
Update Manager Express.
– The current versions of all documentation on the ServerView Suite.
You can retrieve the downloads free of charge from the Fujitsu
Technology Solutions Web server.
For PRIMERGY servers, links are offered on the following topics:
●
Service Desk
●
Manuals
●
Product information
●
Spare parts catalogue
Access to the link collection
You can reach the link collection of the ServerView Suite in various ways:
iRMC S2/S3
33
Documentation for the ServerView Suite
1. Via ServerView Operations Manager.
Ê Select Help – Links on the start page or on the menu bar.
This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection.
2. Via the ServerView Suite DVD 2 or via the start page of the online
documentation for the ServerView Suite on the Fujitsu Technology Solutions
manual server.
I You access the start page of the online documentation via the
following link:
http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com
Ê In the selection list on the left, select Industry standard servers.
Ê Click the menu item PRIMERGY ServerView Links.
This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection.
3. Via the ServerView Suite DVD 1.
Ê In the start window of the ServerView Suite DVD 1, select the option
Select ServerView Software Products.
Ê Click Start. This takes you to the page with the software products of the
ServerView Suite.
Ê On the menu bar select Links.
This opens the start page of the ServerView link collection.
1.9
Documentation for ServerView Suite
The documentation for the ServerView Suite can be found on the ServerView
Suite DVD 2 supplied with each server system.
The documentation can also be downloaded free of charge from the Internet.
You will find the online documentation at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com under the
link Industry standard servers.
34
iRMC S2/S3
Notational conventions
1.10
Notational conventions
The meanings of the symbols used in this manual are as follows:
V Warning
I
This symbol is used to draw attention to risks which
may represent a health hazard or which may lead
to data loss or damage to the hardware.
This symbol is used to highlight important
information and tips.
Ê
This symbol indicates an action which you must
carry out.
Text in italics
In running text, commands, menu items, and the
names of buttons, options, files and paths are
shown in italics.
<text>
Indicates variables which must be replaced by
current values.
Monospaced font
Output from the system is shown in monospaced
font.
Monospaced font
Commands to be entered at the keyboard are
Bold monospaced font shown in bold, monospaced font.
[square brackets]
Indicate optional entries.
{braces}
Indicate a list of alternatives separated by “|”.
[Keyboard] [symbols]
Keys are shown as they appear on the keyboard. If
uppercase characters are to be entered explicitly,
this is indicated for instance by [SHIFT] - [A] for A.
If two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, this
is indicated by a hyphen between the two keyboard
symbols.
Table 2: Notational conventions
If reference is made to passages elsewhere in this manual, the title of the
chapter or section is named and the page number given refers to the start of the
section.
iRMC S2/S3
35
Notational conventions
36
iRMC S2/S3
2
Logging on to the iRMC S2/S3 for
the first time
The factory default settings of the iRMC S2/S3 allow you to log in to the
iRMC S2/S3 for the first time without the need for any configuration activities.
2.1
Requirements
On the remote workstation:
– Windows: Internet Explorer as of Version 7.x:
Linux: Mozilla Firefox 3.x.
– For console redirection:
Sun Java Virtual Machine Version 1.5.0_06 or higher.
In your network:
– You must have a DHCP server in your network.
– If you want to log in with a symbolic name rather than an IP address at the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface, the DHCP server in your network must be
configured for dynamic DNS.
– DNS must be configured. Otherwise you must ask for the IP address.
iRMC S2/S3
37
iRMC S2/S3 factory defaults
2.2
iRMC S2/S3 factory defaults
The firmware of the iRMC S2/S3 provides a default administrator ID and a
default DHCP name for the iRMC S2/S3.
Default administrator ID:
Administrator ID:
admin
Password:
admin
I Both the administrator ID and the password are case-sensitive.
For reasons of security, it is recommended that you create a new
administrator account once you have logged in, and then delete the
default administrator account or at least change the password for the
account (see section "User Management" on page 263).
Default DHCP name of the iRMC S2/S3
The default DHCP name of the iRMC S2/S3 uses the following pattern:
IRMC<SerialNumber>
I The serial number corresponds to the last 3 bytes of the MAC address of
the iRMC S2/S3. You can take the MAC address of the iRMC S2/S3 from
the label on your PRIMERGY server.
After you have logged in, the MAC address of the iRMC S2/S3 can be
found as a read-only entry above the fields on the page Network Interface
(see page 239).
38
iRMC S2/S3
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
2.3
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
Ê Open a web browser on the remote workstation and enter the DNS name or
IP address of the iRMC S2/S3.
I You can take the DNS name of the iRMC S2/S3 from the label on your
PRIMERGY server.
The following login prompt appears:
Figure 6: Login prompt for the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
I If the login prompt does not appear, check the LAN connection (see
section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47).
Ê Type in the data for the default administrator account.
User name: admin
Password: admin
Ê Click OK to confirm your entries.
The iRMC S2/S3 web interface opens showing the System Information page (see
page 146).
iRMC S2/S3
39
3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3
The following tools are available for configuring the iRMC S2/S3:
– BIOS / TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility (see page 44)
– iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see page 135)
– Server Configuration Manager (see page 347)
This chapter provides you with information about the following topics:
– Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3 using the BIOS /
TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility (see page 44).
– Configuring text console redirection via LAN using the BIOS / TrustedCore /
UEFI setup utility (see page 48).
– Configuring the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3 using the BIOS /
TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility (see page 57).
– Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 over the web interface (for an overview, see
page 63).
3.1
Configuring the LAN interface of the
iRMC S2/S3
This section describes:
– Requirements for configuring the LAN interface
– Configuring the LAN interface in the BIOS / TrustedCore® / UEFI setup utility
– Testing the LAN interface
I "Spanning Tree" tree for the connection of the iRMC S2/S3 must be
deactivated (e.g. Port Fast=enabled; Fast Forwarding=enabled).
iRMC S2/S3
41
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3
3.1.1
Prerequisites
Note the following requirements with respect to configuring the IP address:
– The LAN cable must be connected to the correct port. (see section
"Connected to the correct LAN port?" on page 42).
– Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC S2/S3 and the system
(see the section "Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC S2/S3
and the system" on page 43).
3.1.1.1
Connected to the correct LAN port?
The interface for a LAN connection is provided on an onboard LAN controller
assigned to the iRMC S2/S3 (see also figure 4 on page 27).
Depending on the server type, the system board of a PRIMERGY server
provides two or three LAN interfaces. The ports marked with a wrench symbol
are assigned to the iRMC S2/S3 (in figure 7, for example, these are port 1 and
the top left-hand port).
I Check that the LAN cable is connected to the correct port.
Depending on the type of PRIMERGY server, different ports may be
marked with the wrench symbol.
Dedicated Service / Management LAN
(port exclusively for the
iRMC S2/S3; with the iRMC S3
a LAN speed up to 1000 MBit/s
is available, depending on the
server hardware.)
(1)
(2)
Shared LAN
(iRMC S2/S3 and system)
LAN (port exclusively
for the system)
Figure 7: Ports for the iRMC S2/S3 (indicated by wrench symbol)
42
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3
3.1.1.2
Interaction between the IP addresses of the iRMC S2/S3 and the
system
The LAN controller of the PRIMERGY server requires a separate IP address for
the iRMC S2/S3 in order to ensure that data packets are reliably transferred to
the iRMC S2/S3 (and not to the operating system).
The IP address of the iRMC S2/S3 must be different from that of the system
(operating system).
3.1.1.3
Access from a different subnet
If the remote workstation accesses the iRMC S2/S3 of the managed server from
a different subnet and DHCP is not used, you must configure the gateway.
3.1.2
Configuring the LAN interface: Configuration tools
You can configure the iRMC S2/S3’s LAN interface in a number of ways:
Depending on the type of the PRIMERGY server
– using the BIOS / TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility (see page 44),
– iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see section "Network Settings - Configure the
LAN parameters" on page 238),
– using the Server Configuration Manager (see chapter "Configuring
iRMC S2/S3 using the Server Configuration Manager" on page 347).
iRMC S2/S3
43
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3
3.1.3
Configuring the LAN interface using the BIOS /
TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility
You can configure the iRMC S2/S3’s LAN interface using the BIOS /
TrustedCore / UEFI setup utility:
– Use the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility to configure the LAN interface of the
iRMC S2.
– Use the UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) setup utility to
configure the LAN interface of the iRMC S3.
3.1.3.1
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2 by using the BIOS
/ TrustedCore setup utility
I IPv6 addresses are not supported in the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility.
Ê Call the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility of the managed server. Do this by
pressing [F2] while the server is booting.
Ê Call the LAN parameter configuration menu:
– BIOS: Advanced – IPMI – LAN Settings
– TrustedCore: Server – IPMI – LAN Settings
Figure 8: LAN Settings menu (shown here for the TrustedCore setup utility)
44
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3
Ê Configure the following settings:
Service LAN
Set the value to Enabled.
Service LAN Port
The Service setting is recommended.
I The Service setting is mandatory for the Type TX150 S6
PRIMERGY server.
DHCP
If you enable DHCP, the iRMC S2 gets its LAN settings autonomously
from a DHCP server on the network. In this case, the values for Local
IP Address, Subnet Mask, etc. are set automatically.
I Do not activate the DHCP option if no DHCP server is
available. If you activate the DHCP option and there is no
DHCP server available, the iRMC S2 goes into a search loop
(i.e. it constantly searches for a DHCP server).You can specify
that the DHCP and DNS services are to be used after initial
installation, using the iRMC S2 web interface, for instance (see
section "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the
iRMC S2/S3" on page 249).
By default, the following name is passed to the DHCP server
on initial installation of the iRMC S3:
iRMC<last 3 bytes of the MAC address>.
Local IP Address
Enter the IP address you have determined for the iRMC S2 of the
managed system.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask for the network. the iRMC S2 is connected to.
Gateway Address
Specify the IP address of the gateway of the network the iRMC S2 is
connected to.
Ê Save the settings.
iRMC S2/S3
45
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3
Ê If you want to use console redirection on the iRMC S2 continue with section
"Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S2" on page 49.
If you do not want to use text console redirection on the iRMC S2, exit the
BIOS/TrustedCore setup and continue with the next section "Testing the LAN
interface".
3.1.3.2
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S3 by using the UEFI
setup Utility
Ê Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server. Do this by pressing [F2]
while the server is booting.
Ê Call the iRMC LAN parameter configuration menu:
Server Mgmt – iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration
Figure 9: iRMC LAN Parameters Configuration Menu
46
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the LAN interface of the iRMC S2/S3
Ê Configure the following settings:
Management LAN
Set the value to Enabled.
Management LAN Port
The Management setting is recommended.
I For details on configuring the remaining settings see section
"Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters" on page 238
and/or refer to the manual "BIOS (Aptio) Setup Utility" manual
corresponding to your server.
Ê Save the settings.
Ê If you want to use console redirection on the iRMC S3, continue with section
"Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S3" on page 53.
If you do not want to use text console redirection on the iRMC S3, exit the
UEFI setup and continue with the next section "Testing the LAN interface".
3.1.4
Testing the LAN interface
You can test the LAN interface as follows:
Ê Use a web browser to attempt to log into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface. If
no login prompt appears, it is probable that the LAN interface is not working.
Ê Test the connection to the iRMC S2/S3 with a ping command.
iRMC S2/S3
47
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
3.2
Configuring text console redirection via
LAN using the BIOS / TrustedCore / UEFI
setup utility
Text console redirection will be available depending on the configuration of text
console redirection and on the operating system of the server
– either for the duration of the BIOS POST phase only or
– beyond the BIOS POST phase while the operating system is running.
This section describes:
– Configuration of text console redirection via LAN using the BIOS /
TrustedCore setup utility (for iRMC S2)
– Configuration of text console redirection via LAN using the UEFI setup utility
(for iRMC S3)
– Special requirements of the operating system used that you need to take
account of if you also want to use console redirection while the operating
system is running.
I You can also configure text console redirection via LAN using the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see section "BIOS Text Console - Configure
and start text console redirection" on page 292).
48
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
3.2.1
Configuring text console redirection for the
iRMC S2
Ê Call the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility of the managed server. Do this by
pressing [F2] while the server is booting.
Settings in the Peripheral Configuration menu
Ê Call the Peripheral Configuration menu:
Advanced – Peripheral Configuration
Figure 10: Peripheral Configuration menu (as it appears in the TrustedCore setup utility)
Ê Configure the following settings:
Serial 1
Set the value to Enabled.
Serial 1 Address
Accept the first value pair proposed.
Serial Multiplexer
Set the value to iRMC.
iRMC S2/S3
49
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
Settings in the Console Redirection menu
Ê Call the Console Redirection menu:
Server – Console Redirection
I The appearance of the Console Direction menu varies depending on
the setup utility (BIOS or TrustedCore) you are using.
Ê Make the following settings in the BIOS setup utility:
Figure 11: Console Redirection menu (as it appears in the BIOS setup utility)
Console Redirection
Set the value to Enabled.
Port
Set the value to Serial 1.
Baud Rate
Specify the baud rate.
Protocol
Leave this setting unchanged. (The setting depends on the terminal
type used.)
Flow Control
Leave this setting unchanged. (The setting depends on the terminal
type used.)
50
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
Mode
This setting affects the behavior of console redirection while the
operating system is running (after the POST phase has completed) see section "Using console redirection while the operating system is
running" on page 55:
Standard
Console redirection is terminated after the BIOS POST phase.
Enhanced
Console redirection continues to be available after the BIOS
POST phase.
Ê Make the following settings in the TrustedCore setup utility:
Figure 12: Console Redirection menu (as it appears in the TrustedCore setup utility)
Com Port Address
Set the value to On-board COM A.
Baud Rate
Specify the baud rate.
Console Type
Leave this setting unchanged. (The setting depends on the terminal
type used.)
iRMC S2/S3
51
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
Flow Control
The setting depends on the terminal type used. The settings must be
the same on both terminal and managed server.
Continue C.R. after POST:
This setting affects the behavior of console redirection while the
operating system is running (after the POST phase has completed) see section "Using console redirection while the operating system is
running" on page 55:
Off
Console redirection is terminated after the BIOS POST phase.
On
Console redirection continues to be available after the BIOS
POST phase.
Exiting the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility
Ê Save your settings and exit the BIOS/TrustedCore setup utility.
Ê Continue with section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47.
52
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
3.2.2
Configuring text console redirection for the
iRMC S3
Ê Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server. Do this by pressing [F2]
while the server is booting.
Ê Call the Server Mgmt menu:
Figure 13: Server Mgmt Menu
Ê Make the following settings:
Serial Multiplexer
Set the value to iRMCS3.
iRMC S2/S3
53
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
Ê Call the Console Redirection menu:
Figure 14: Console Redirection menu
Ê Make the following settings in the Console Redirection menu:
Console Redirection
Set the value to Serial 1. In this case, the terminal uses the first serial
interface.
Baud Rate
Specify the baud rate.
Protocol
Leave this setting unchanged. (The setting depends on the terminal
type used.)
Flow Control
The setting depends on the terminal type used. The settings must be
the same on both terminal and managed server.
Exiting the UEFI setup utility
Ê Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup utility.
Ê Continue with section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47.
54
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
3.2.3
Using console redirection while the operating
system is running
Depending on the operating system used on the managed server, you can
continue to use console redirection after the BIOS POST phase.
DOS
The BIOS setting for console redirection mode must be set as follows (see
section "Settings in the Console Redirection menu" on page 50):
– BIOS setup utility: Mode: Enhanced
– TrustedCore setup utility: Continue C.R. after POST: On
Windows Server 2003 / 2008
I If activated during Windows installation, console redirection is thereby
automatically configured.
If console redirection is activated after Windows installation has
completed, you must configure console redirection manually.
Windows Server 2003 / 2008 handles console redirection automatically after the
POST phase. No further settings are necessary. While the operating system is
booting, the Windows Server 2003 SAC console is transferred:
Figure 15: Windows Server 2003 SAC console
iRMC S2/S3
55
Configuring text console redirection via LAN
Linux
You must configure a Linux operating system in such a way that it handles
console redirection after the POST phase. Once it has been configured, you
have unrestricted access from the remote workstation.
Settings required
The settings may differ between program versions.
SuSe and RedHat
Add the following line to the end of the file /etc/inittab:
xx:12345:respawn:/sbin/agetty <baud-rate> ttyS0
RedHat
Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /etc/grub.conf:
console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0
SuSE
Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /boot/grub/menu.lst :
console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0
56
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3
3.3
Configuring and using the serial interface
of the iRMC S2/S3
The serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3 offers you the following possibilities:
– You can use the terminal application Remote Manager (Serial) over a null
modem cable (see section "Using the Remote Manager (Serial) interface"
on page 62).
– In the case of an iRMC S2, you can forward alerts via modem. You can
configure alerting via modem using the web interface of the iRMC S2 (see
section "Serial / Modem Alerting - Configure alerting via modem" on
page 255).
iRMC S2/S3
57
Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3
3.3.1
Configuring the serial interface of the iRMC S2
Ê Call the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility of the managed server. Do this by
pressing [F2] while the server is booting.
Ê Call the Peripheral Configuration menu to configure the serial port:
Advanced – Peripheral Configuration
Figure 16: Peripheral Configuration menu (as it appears in the TrustedCore setup utility)
Ê Configure the following settings:
Serial 1
Set the value to Enabled.
Serial 1 Address
Accept the first value pair proposed.
Serial Multiplexer
Set the value to iRMC.
58
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3
The following values are not shown in the menu and are preset (see
page 62, “Terminal program (VT100+)”):
Bits per second
9600
Data bits
8
Parity
None.
Stop bits
1
Flow Control
None
Exiting the BIOS / TrustedCore setup utility
Ê Save your settings and exit the BIOS/TrustedCore setup utility.
Ê Continue with section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47.
iRMC S2/S3
59
Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3
3.3.2
Configuring the serial interface using of the
iRMC S3
Ê Call the UEFI setup utility of the managed server. Do this by pressing [F2]
while the server is booting.
Ê Call the Server Mgmt menu:
Figure 17: Server Mgmt menu
Ê Configure the following settings:
Serial Multiplexer
Set the value to iRMCS3.
Ê Call the Serial Port 1 Configuration menu to configure the serial port:
Advanced – Super IO Configuration – Serial Port 1 Configuration:
60
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3
Figure 18: Serial Port 1 Configuration menu
Ê Configure the following settings:
Serial Port
Set the value to Enabled.
Device Settings
Displays the base I/O address and the interrupt used to access the
corresponding serial port, e.g. IO=3F8h; IRQ=4.
Accept the value pair proposed.
The following values are not shown in the menu and are preset (see
page 62, “Terminal program (VT100+)”):
Bits per second
9600
Data bits
8
Parity
None.
Stop bits
1
iRMC S2/S3
61
Configuring and using the serial interface of the iRMC S2/S3
Flow Control
None
Exiting the UEFI setup utility
Ê Save your settings and exit the UEFI setup utility.
Ê Continue with section "Testing the LAN interface" on page 47.
3.3.3
Using the Remote Manager (Serial) interface
If you connect a computer over a null modem cable and start a terminal program
(VT100+) on this computer, you can access the Remote Manager (Serial)
terminal program. The Remote Manager (Serial) interface is identical to the
Remote Manager interface (see chapter "iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet/SSH (Remote
Manager)" on page 321).
Prerequisites
On the managed server:
The Serial Multiplexer BIOS setting must be configured on the iRMC (see
section "Configuring the serial interface of the iRMC S2" on page 58).
Terminal program (VT100+):
Configure the following port settings for the terminal program:
Bits per second
Set the value to 9600.
Data bits
Set the value to 8.
Parity
Set the value to None.
Stop bits
Set the value to 1.
Flow Control
Set the value to None.
62
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 over the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
3.4
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 over the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface
Ê Start the iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see section "Logging into the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface" on page 136).
3.4.1
Configuring the LAN parameters
Ê In the navigation area, click Network Settings (see section "Network Settings
- Configure the LAN parameters" on page 238).
Configuring the LAN settings
Ê Configure the LAN settings on the Network Interface page. See the section
"Network Interface Settings - Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC
S2/S3" on page 239 for the settings required.
Configuring ports and network services
Ê Configure the ports and network services on the Ports and Network Services
page. See the section "Ports and Network Services - Configuring ports and
network services" on page 245 for the settings required.
Configuring DHCP/DNS (Dynamic DNS)
Ê Configure the DHCP and DNS settings in the DNS Configuration page. See
the section "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC S2/S3" on
page 249 for the settings required.
iRMC S2/S3
63
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 over the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
3.4.2
Configuring alerting
The pages for configuring alerting are grouped in the navigation area under
Alerting (see section "Alerting - Configure alerting" on page 253).
Configuring alert forwarding over SNMP
Ê In the navigation area, click SNMP Traps. The SNMP Traps page appears.
Ê Configure SNMP trap forwarding. See the section "SNMP Trap Alerting Configure SNMP trap alerting" on page 254 for the settings required.
Configuring alert forwarding to a mobile phone via modem
(only with the iRMC S2)
Ê In the navigation area, click Serial / Modem. The Serial / Modem Alerting page
appears.
Ê Configure alert forwarding via modem. See the section "Serial / Modem
Alerting - Configure alerting via modem" on page 255 for the settings
required.
Configuring email notification (email alerting)
Ê In the navigation area, click Email. The Email Alerting page appears.
Ê Configure email alerting. See the section "Email Alerting - Configure email
alerting" on page 257 for the settings required.
3.4.3
Configuring text console redirection
Ê Configure text console redirection in the BIOS Text Console window. See the
section "BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console redirection"
on page 292 for the settings required.
64
iRMC S2/S3
4
User management for the
iRMC S2/S3
User management for the iRMC S2/S3 uses two different types of user
identifications:
– Local user identifications are stored locally in the iRMC S2/S3’s nonvolatile storage and are managed via the iRMC S2/S3 user interfaces.
– Global user identifications are stored in the central data store of a
directory service and are managed via this directory service’s interfaces.
The following directory services are currently supported for global
iRMC S2/S3 user management:
–
–
–
–
Microsoft® Active Directory
Novell® eDirectory
OpenLDAP
OpenDS
This chapter provides information on the following topics:
– User management concept for the iRMC S2/S3
– User permissions
– Local user management on the iRMC S2/S3
I For detailed information on the global user management using the
individual directory services, please refer to the "User Management in
ServerView" manual.
iRMC S2/S3
65
Concept
4.1
User management concept for the
iRMC S2/S3
User management for the iRMC S2/S3 permits the parallel administration of
local and global user identifications.
When validating the authentication data (user name, password) which users
enter when logging in to one of the iRMC S2/S3 interfaces, iRMC S2/S3
proceeds as follows (see also figure 19 on page 67):
1. The iRMC S2/S3 compares the user name and password with the locally
stored user identifications:
●
If the user is authenticated successfully by iRMC S2/S3 (user name and
password are valid) then the user can log in.
●
Otherwise, the iRMC S2/S3 continues the verification with step 2.
2. The iRMC S2/S3 authenticates itself at the directory service via LDAP with
a user name and password, determines the user rights by means of an
LDAP query and checks whether the user is authorized to work with these
at the iRMC S2/S3.
66
iRMC S2/S3
Concept
iRMC S2/S3 web
interface
Login
SSH
Login
SSL
SSH
Telnet
Login
Serial
interface
Login
User name, password
SSL
SSH
iRMC S2/S3
local user identifications
SSL
User name, password
SSL
LDAP login
Directory service
Global user identifications
Bild 19: Login authentication via the iRMC S2/S3
I Although optional, the use of SSL for the LDAP connection between the
iRMC S2/S3 and directory service is recommended. An SSL-secured
LDAP connection between iRMC S2/S3 and the directory service
guarantees secure data exchange, and in particular the secure transfer
of the user name and password data.
SSL login via the iRMC S2/S3 web interface is only required if LDAP is
active (LDAP enable option, see page 274).
iRMC S2/S3
67
User permissions
4.2
User permissions
The iRMC S2/S3 distinguishes between two mutually complementary types of
user permissions:
– Channel-specific privileges (via assignment to channel-specific permission
groups)
– Permissions to use special iRMC S2/S3 functions
I The privileges and permissions required for the use of the individual
iRMC S2/S3 functions are described
– for the iRMC S2/S3-web interface, on page 138,
– for the Remote Manager, on page 330.
Channel-specific privileges (channel-specific permission groups)
The iRMC S2/S3 assigns each user identification to one of the following four
channel-specific permission groups:
–
–
–
–
users
Operator
Administrator
OEM
Since iRMC S2/S3 assigns these permissions on a channel-specific basis,
users can have different permissions, depending on whether they access the
iRMC S2/S3 over the LAN interface or the serial interface.
The scope of permissions granted increases from User (lowest permission level)
through Operator and Administrator up to OEM (highest permission level).
I The permission groups correspond to the IPMI privilege level. Certain
permissions (e.g. for Power Management) are associated with these
groups or privilege levels.
68
iRMC S2/S3
User permissions
Permissions to use special iRMC S2/S3 functions
In addition to the channel-specific permissions, you can also individually assign
users the following permissions:
– Configure User Accounts
Permission to configure local user identifications
– Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Permission to configure the iRMC S2/S3 settings.
– Video Redirection Enabled
Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View Only” and
“Full Control” mode
– Remote Storage Enabled
Permission to use the Remote Storage functionality
Preconfigured user ID
The firmware of the iRMC S2/S3 provides a default administrator ID for the
iRMC S2/S3 which possesses all permissions:
Administrator ID:
admin
Password:
admin
I Both the administrator ID and the password are case-sensitive in the
case of local users.
It is urgently recommended that you create a new administrator account
as soon as possible once you have logged in, and then delete the default
administrator account or at least change the password for the account
(see section "User Management" on page 263).
iRMC S2/S3
69
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
4.3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
The iRMC S2/S3 possesses its own local user management. Up to 16 users to
be configured with passwords and be assigned various rights depending on the
user groups they belong to. The user identifications are stored in the
iRMC S2/S3’s local, non-volatile storage.
The following options are available for user management on the iRMC S2/S3:
– User management via the web interface
– User management via the Server Configuration Manager
4.3.1
Local user management using the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface
I User management on the iRMC S2/S3 requires Configure User Accounts
permission.
You can view a list of configured users under the web interface. You can also
configure new users, change the configuration of existing users and remove
users from the list.
Ê Start the iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see section "Logging into the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface" on page 136).
Showing the list of configured users
Ê In the navigation area, click the User Management - iRMC S2/S3 User function.
The User Management page opens containing a list of configured users (see
page 264). Here, you can delete users and call the page for configuring new
users.
This page is described in section "User Management" on page 263.
70
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Configuring new users
Ê On the User Management page, click the New User button.
The New User Configuration page opens. This page allows you to configure
the basic settings for the new user. This page is described in section "New
User Configuration - Configuring a new user" on page 265.
Modifying the configuration of a user
Ê On the User Management page, click the name of the user whose
configuration parameters you want to change.
The User “<name>” Configuration page opens showing the settings for the
selected user. Here, you can change the configuration parameters for the
new user. This page is described in section "User “<name>” Configuration User configuration (details)" on page 266.
Deleting users
Ê On the User Management page, click on the Delete button in the same line as
the user to be deleted.
4.3.2
Local user management via the Server
Configuration Manager
I Prerequisite:
The current ServerView agents must be installed on the managed server.
I User management on the iRMC S2/S3 requires Configure User Accounts
permission.
User management via the Server Configuration Manager largely conforms to
user management using the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
In chapter "Configuring iRMC S2/S3 using the Server Configuration Manager"
on page 347 is described how to start the Server Configuration Manager.
For details on the individual Configuration Manager dialogs, please refer to the
online help of the Server Configuration Manager.
iRMC S2/S3
71
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
4.3.3
SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S2/S3
users
In addition to authentication by means of a user name and password, the
iRMC S2/S3 also supports SSHv2-based public key authentication using pairs
of public and private keys for local users. To implement SSHv2 public key
authentication, the SSHv2 key of an iRMC S2/S3 user is uploaded to the
iRMC S2/S3 and the iRMC S2/S3 user uses their private key with the program
PuTTY or the OpenSSH client program ssh, for example.
The iRMC S2/S3 supports the following types of public keys:
– SSH DSS (minimum requirement)
– SSH RSA (recommended)
The public SSHv2 keys that you upload to the iRMC S2/S3 can be available
either in RFC4716 format or in OpenSSH format (see page 84).
Public key authentication
In outline, public key authentication of a user on the iRMC S2/S3 happens as
follows:
The user who wishes to log into the iRMC S2/S3 creates the key pair:
– The private key is read-protected and remains on the user's computer.
– The user (or administrator) uploads the public key to the iRMC S2/S3.
If the configuration allows this, the user can now log into the iRMC S2/S3
extremely securely and without the need to enter a password. The user is only
responsible for keeping their private key secret.
The following steps are necessary to set up private key authentication. They are
described in the subsequent sections:
1. Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with the program PuTTYgen or
ssh-keygen and saving them in separate files (see page 73).
2. Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC S2/S3 from a file
(see page 77).
3. Configuring the program PuTTY or ssh for SSHv2 access to the iRMC S2/S3
(see page 79).
72
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
4.3.3.1
reating public and private SSHv2 keys
You can create public and private SSHv2 keys
– with the program PuTTYgen or
– with the OpenSSH client program ssh-keygen.
Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with PuTTYgen
Proceed as follows:
Ê Start PuTTYgen on your Windows computer.
The following window appears when PuTTYgen is started:
Bild 20: PuTTYgen: Creating new private and public SSHv2 keys
Ê Under Parameters, select the key type SSH-2RSA and click Generate to start
generation of the keys.
The progress of the generation operation is then displayed under Key (see
figure 21 on page 74).
iRMC S2/S3
73
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Bild 21: PuTTYgen: Creating a new key pair (progress bar).
Ê Move the mouse pointer over the blank area of the progress display to
increase the randomness of the generated keys.
When the keys have been generated, PuTTYgen displays the key and the
fingerprint of the public SSHv2 key:
Bild 22: PuTTYgen: Creating a new private SSHv2 key (progress bar).
Ê Click Save public key to save the public SSHv2 key to a file. You can upload
the public key to the iRMC S2/S3 from this file (see page 77).
Ê Click Save private key to save the private SSHv2 key to a file for use with
PuTTY (see page 79).
74
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Creating the public and private SSHv2 keys with ssh-keygen
I If it is not already pre-installed in the Linux distribution you are using, you
can obtain OpenSSH from http://www.openssh.org.
You will find a detailed description of the operands in the OpenSSH
OpenSSH manual pages under http://www.openssh.org/manual.html
Proceed as follows:
Ê Call ssh-keygen to generate an RSA key pair:
ssh-keygen -t rsa
ssh-keygen logs the progress of the key generation operation. ssh-keygen
queries the user for the file name under which the private key is to be stored
and for the passphrase for the private key. ssh-keygen stores the resulting
private and public SSHv2 keys in separate files and displays the fingerprint
of the public key.
Example: Generating an RSA key pair with ssh -keygen
1
2
3
4
5
iRMC S2/S3
75
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Explanation:
1. ssh-keygen requests the file name under which the SSHv2 key is to be
saved. If you press [Enter] to confirm without entering a file name,
ssh-keygen uses the default file name id_rsa.
2. ssh-keygen requests you to enter a passphrase (and to confirm it) that
is used to encrypt the private key. If you press [Enter] to confirm
without entering a passphrase, ssh-keygen does not use a passphrase.
3. ssh-keygen informs the user that the newly generated private SSHv2
key has been saved in the file /.ssh/id_rsa.
4. ssh-keygen informs the user that the newly generated public SSHv2
key has been saved in the file /.ssh/id_rsa.pub.
5. ssh-keygen displays the fingerprint of the public SSHv2 key and the
local login to which the public key belongs.
76
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
4.3.3.2
Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC S2/S3 from a file
Proceed as follows:
Ê Under the iRMC S2/S3 web interface, open the detailed view for the required
browser (in this case user3) iRMC S2/S3 User Management page:
(1)
(2)
Bild 23: iRMC S2/S3 web interface: Loading the public SSHv2 key onto the iRMC S2/S3
Ê Click Browse in the group User SSHv2 public key upload from file (1) and
navigate to the file containing the required public key (2).
iRMC S2/S3
77
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Ê Click Upload to load the public key onto the iRMC S2/S3.
After the key has been successfully uploaded, the iRMC S2/S3 displays the
key fingerprint in the group User SSHv2 public key upload from file:
Key type
Key length
MD5 fingerprint of the saved key
Bild 24: Display of the key fingerprint
I For reasons of security, make sure that the fingerprint shown here
matches that shown in PuTTYgen (see figure 22 on page 74) under
Key fingerprint.
78
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
4.3.3.3
Configuring PuTTY and the OpenSSH client for using the public
SSHv2 key
Configuring PuTTY for using the public SSHv2 key
The PuTTY program allows you to set up a public-key-authenticated connection
to the iRMC S2/S3 and log in either under your user name or using the autologin mechanism. PuTTY handles the authentication protocol automatically on
the basis of the public/private SSHv2 key pair previously generated.
Proceed as follows:
Ê Start PuTTY on your Windows computer.
The following window appears when PuTTY is started:
Bild 25: PuTTY: Selecting and loading an SSH session
Ê Select a saved SSH session or create a new SSH session for the
iRMC S2/S3 for which you want to use the SSHv2 key.
iRMC S2/S3
79
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Ê Click Load to load the selected SSH session.
This opens the following window:
Bild 26: PuTTY: Loading an SSH session
Ê Choose SSH - Auth to configure the SSH authentication options.
This opens the following window (see figure 27 on page 81).
80
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
Bild 27: Configuring the SSH authentication options
Ê Select the file containing the private key that you want to use with the
iRMC S2/S3.
I Please note:
At this point, you require the private key (see page 74) and not the
public key that you loaded onto the iRMC S2/S3.
iRMC S2/S3
81
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
I Under Connection - Data, you can additionally specify a user name for
automatic login onto the iRMC S2/S3.
Bild 28: PuTTY: Specifying the user name for automatically logging into the iRMC
S2/S3
Configuring the OpenSSH client program ssh for using the public SSHv2
key
You establish an SSHv2-protected connection to the iRMC S2/S3 using the
OpenSSH client program ssh. You can log in either under your current local login
or under a different login.
I The login must have been configured as a local login on the iRMC S2/S3
and the associated SSHv2 key must have been loaded on the
iRMC S2/S3.
ssh reads its configuration options in order from the following sources:
1. Command line arguments that you specify when calling ssh:
2. User-specific configuration file ($HOME/.ssh/config)
82
iRMC S2/S3
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
I Although this file contains no security-critical information, read/write
permission should only be granted to the owner. Access should be
denied to all other users.
3. System-wide configuration file (/etc/ssh/ssh_config)
This file contains default values for configuration parameters
– if there is no user-specific configuration file or
– if the relevant parameters are not specified in the user-specific
configuration file.
The value found first applies for each option.
I You will find detailed information on the configuration of ssh and on its
operands on the manual pages for OpenSSH under
http://www.openssh.org/manual.html
Proceed as follows:
Ê Start ssh, to log in to the iRMC S2/S3 under SSHv2-authentication:
ssh -l [<user>] <iRMC_S2/S3>
or
ssh [<user>@]<iRMC_S2/S3>
<user>
User name under which you want to log into the iRMC S2/S3. If you
do not specify <user>, ssh uses the user name under which you are
logged into your local computer to log you in to iRMC S2/S3.
<iRMC_S2/S3>
iRMC S2/S3 name or IP address of the iRMC S2/S3 you want to log
into.
Example: SSHv2-authenticated login on the iRMC S2/S3
For the following ssh- call, it is assumed that ssh-keygen has been used to
generate a public/private RSA key pair as described under "Example:
Generating an RSA key pair with ssh -keygen" on page 75 and that the
public key User1/.ssh/id_rsa.pub has been loaded onto the iRMC S2/S3 for an
iRMC S2/S3 user user4 (see page 77).
You can then log in from your local computer under $HOME/User1 as follows
on the iRMC S2 "RX100_S52-iRMC" using the login user4:
iRMC S2/S3
83
Local user management for the iRMC S2/S3
ssh user4@RX100_S52-iRMC
4.3.3.4
Example: Public SSHv2 key
The following shows the same public SSHv2 key in both RFC4716 format and
in OpenSSH format.
Public SSHv2 key in RFC4716 format
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---Comment: "rsa-key-20090401"
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABJQAAAIBScBsgP9B74qNa9+w8Ccv3kDVVu2boKCGLv4hx
v6+AUFrF6sYdGey1QQ7MkwSeax3NmoZBkvkR9hNfZSqxkPCkd//LyUil9US5/9Ar
JxjlhXUzlPPVzuBtPaRB7+bISTJVMUorNwrcN48b6AAoYBhKC4AOtOP1OGsfc+F
pGJ2iw==
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----
Public SSHv2 key in OpenSSH format
ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABJQAAAIBScBsgP9B74qNa9+w8Ccv3kDVVu2boKCGLv4hx
v6+AUFrF6sYdGey1QQ7MkwSeax3NmoZBkvkR9hNfZSqxkPCkd//LyUil9US5/9Ar
JxjlhXUzlPPVzuBtPaRB7+bISTJVMUorNwrcN48b6AAoYBhKC4AOtOP1OGwsfc+F
pGJ2iw== rsa-key-20090401
84
iRMC S2/S3
5
Advanced Video Redirection
(AVR)
I A valid license key is required to use the Advanced Video Redirection
function.
Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) allows you to control the mouse and
keyboard of the managed server from your remote workstation and to show the
current graphical and text output from the managed server.
I The AVR Java applet allows you to use the Remote Storage function
(see chapter "Remote Storage" on page 111).
This chapter provides information on the following topics:
– Checking the AVR settings
– Using AVR
– Menus of the AVR window
iRMC S2/S3
85
Prerequisites
5.1
Requirements:
Check the AVR settings
Check the following important settings before using AVR:
Graphics mode settings on the managed server
AVR supports the following graphics modes:
Resolution
Refresh rates
[in Hz]
Maximum
color depth
[bits]
640 x 480 (VGA)
60; 75; 85
32
800 x 600 (SVGA)
56; 60; 72; 75; 85 32
1024 x 768 (XGA)
60; 70; 75; 85
32
1152 x 864
60; 70; 75
32
1280 x 1024 (UXGA) 60; 70; 75; 85
16
1280 x 1024 (UXGA) 60
24
1600 x 1200 (UXGA) 60; 65
16
1680 x 1050
1
60
16
1920 x 1080
1
60
16
1920 x 1200
1
60
16
Table 3: Supported display settings
1
iRMC S3 only
I If a high-resolution graphics mode is set on the server (shown on a gray
background in the table), this is shown on the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
I Only VESA-compliant graphics modes are supported.
86
iRMC S2/S3
Prerequisites
Supported text mode
The iRMC S2/S3 supports the following common text modes:
–
–
–
–
40 x 25
80 x 25
80 x 43
80 x 50
Refer to the Help system for your operating system for information on the display
settings.
Keyboard settings
I The keyboard settings must be identical:
– on the remote workstation,
– on the managed server,
– on the iRMC S2/S3.
iRMC S2/S3
87
Using AVR
5.2
Using AVR
Ê To start AVR, click the Start Video Redirection or Start Video Redirection (Java
Web Start) button on the Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) page of the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see page 302).
The Advanced Video Redirection window (AVR window) opens, showing you
the display on the managed server.
The AVR window also contains the following elements:
– Menu bar: The Preferences and Extras menus allow you to configure the
AVR settings and to control the AVR (see page 101). Remote Storage is
used to call the remote storage function (see page 105).
Languages (see page 107) menu allows you to set the language
(German/English) in which the menus and dialog boxes of the AVR
window are to be shown.
– Integrated special keys (see page 91).
– The Local Monitor <status> indicator shows whether the local monitor of
the managed server is switched on (see section "Local Monitor Off"
function" on page 90).
Menu bar
Integrated special keys
Local Monitor <status>
Figure 29: Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) window
88
iRMC S2/S3
Using AVR
5.2.1
Using a low bandwidth
In the case of a reduced data transfer rate, you can configure a lower bandwidth
(bits per pixel, bpp) in terms of color depth for your current AVR session (see
page 109).
5.2.2
Parallel AVR sessions
AVR can be used by two user sessions simultaneously. One user has full control
over the server (full-control mode) and the other can only passively observe
keyboard and mouse operation of the server (view only mode).
When AVR is first started, you are initially in view only mode. You will always be
asked if you want to switch to full-control mode. If you decide to switch to fullcontrol mode and another full-control mode session is already active, the
existing session is switched to view-only mode.
iRMC S2/S3
89
Using AVR
5.2.3
Local Monitor Off" function
The Local Monitor Off function of the iRMC S2/S3 allows you to power down the
local monitor of the managed server for the duration of your AVR session. In this
way, you ensure that the inputs you make and the actions you perform on the
local monitor on the server using AVR cannot be seen. The identification LED
flashes to indicate "Local Monitor Off" mode on the server.
You configure the “Local Monitor Off” function on the Advanced Video Redirection
page of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see page 302). After you have
configured the system appropriately, you can switch the local monitor of the
server on and off from the remote workstation as follows:
– In Full Control mode in an AVR session using the Extras menu
– directly on the Advanced Video Redirection page with administrator or OEM
permissions
You can also configure that the local monitor is always switched off
automatically whenever a new AVR session is started.
The current status of the local monitor is shown in the AVR window in blue
letters to the top right of the integrated special keys:
The local monitor is always switched on and cannot be switched off, as
the Enable Local Monitor Off option (see page 307) is deactivated.
Local Monitor On
The local monitor is on, but can be switched off.
Local Monitor Off
The local monitor is off, but can be switched on.
Local Monitor always off
The local monitor is always switched off and cannot be switched on
because a high-resolution graphics mode has been set on the managed
server (see table 3 on page 86).
90
iRMC S2/S3
Using AVR
5.2.4
Redirecting the keyboard
Keyboard redirection only works when the focus is on the AVR window.
Ê If keyboard redirection appears not to be working, simply click on the AVR
window.
Ê If the keyboard does not respond, check that the AVR window is not in viewonly mode. How to switch to full-control mode is described on page 103.
Special key combinations
AVR passes all normal key combinations to the server. Special keys such as
Windows keys are not sent. Some special key combinations suchas [ALT] +
[F4] cannot be sent, because they are interrupted by the client’s operating
system. In such cases, you should use the integrated special keys or the virtual
keyboard.
Integrated special keys
Below the menu bar of the AVR window, you will find a bar containing the special
keys. These keys are implemented as “sticky keys”, i.e. they remain pressed
when you click them and only return to their normal position when you click them
again.
Using the integrated special keys, you can, for instance, use Windows keys or
special key combinations which are not sent by AVR if you press them on your
own keyboard.
Figure 30: AVR window - integrated special keys
[Mouse Sync]
Press this key to synchronize the mouse pointers (see also section
"Synchronizing the mouse pointer" on page 93).
[Ctrl]
Left CTRL key (corresponds to the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard).
[Alt]
Alt(ernate) key (corresponds to the [Alt] key on your keyboard).
iRMC S2/S3
91
Using AVR
[Win]
Left and right Windows keys (correspond to the keys on your keyboard
between the left and right [Ctrl] and [Alt ] keys).
[Alt Gr]
Alt(ernate) Gr(aphic) key (corresponds to the [Alt Gr] key on your
keyboard).
[Context]
Context menu for the selected object (corresponds to the key
combination [Shift] + [F10] on your keyboard).
[Lock]
Caps lock (corresponds to the [Caps Lock] key on your keyboard).
[Ctrl-Alt-Del]
Corresponds to the key combination [Ctrl]+ [Alt] + [Del] on your
keyboard.
Virtual keyboard
The virtual keyboard (see figure 31) provides you with a functional
representation of the keyboard. All key combinations are available when you
use the virtual keyboard. This means that you can use the virtual keyboard as
a fully functional replacement for a real keyboard.
You activate the virtual keyboard in the AVR window from the Extras menu (see
page 102).
Figure 31: Virtual Keyboard (keyboard layout: German (DE))
92
iRMC S2/S3
Using AVR
Secure Keyboard
If you are connected to the iRMC S2/S3 web interface over an HTTPS
connection, entries at the keyboard are transferred over a secure SSL
connection.
5.2.5
Redirecting the mouse
The mouse pointer on the managed server is moved synchronously with the
mouse on the remote workstation. You configure the mouse redirection settings
in the AVR window under Mouse Mode in the Preferences menu (see page 108).
5.2.5.1
Synchronizing the mouse pointer
When the AVR window is first opened, it is possible that the mouse pointer on
the remote workstation (local mouse pointer) is not yet synchronized with the
mouse pointer on the managed server.
To synchronize the two mouse pointers, use one of the following alternatives
(see figure 32 on page 94):
Ê Click [Mouse Sync] in the menu bar of the AVR window.
Ê Move the local mouse pointer to the top left corner of the AVR window. The
mouse pointer on the managed server automatically follows this movement.
The pointers are synchronized when the two mouse pointers completely
overlap.
iRMC S2/S3
93
Using AVR
(3)
(1)
(2)
Press the Mouse Sync key
or
(1) Drag the local mouse cursor to the top left corner.
(2) The server’s mouse pointer follows automatically.
(3) The mouse pointers are synchronized when they completely
overlap and e displayed as a single mouse pointer.
Figure 32: Synchronizing the local mouse pointer and the mouse pointer of the managed
server
I Correct synchronization of the mouse pointers requires that certain
settings are made on the managed server. If the managed server has
been installed using the ServerView Installation Manager these settings
has been preconfigured automatically by the Matrox VGA installation.
If synchronization of the mouse pointers does not function correctly, for
instance because the preconfigured settings have been changed, you
can restore correct synchronization of the mouse pointers by making the
settings described below. The settings must be made on the managed
server.
94
iRMC S2/S3
Using AVR
I The settings for the mouse pointer synchronization are supported only
for the operating system which runs the managed server.
If the software which controls the mouse is active, sometimes the mouse
pointer cannot be synchronized.
5.2.5.2
Managed Windows server:
Adjusting the settings for synchronization of the mouse pointers
On a Windows server, you can either make the settings for mouse pointer
synchronization using a batch program or using the Windows Start menu and
the context menu.
You must adjust the following settings:
– Speed of the mouse pointer
– Hardware acceleration
I When you adjust the settings using a batch program, the Matrox graphics
driver is installed as well as the mouse pointer speed and hardware
acceleration being adjusted.
You can make all the settings for the managed server either directly at the
managed server or from the remote workstation over AVR.
Adjusting the settings on the managed server using a batch program
Proceed as follows:
Ê Open a DOS prompt window.
Ê Switch to the folder in which the batch program install_kronos2_vga.bat for
the relevant Matrox VGA driver installation (32-bit or 64-bit) is located.
I By default, you will find the install_kronos2_vga.bat programs under:
C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\ServerView Suite\Installation Manager\
Content\V10.09.12.00\DRV\VIDEO\MATROX\iRMC\W2K
and on your ServerView Suite DVD 1.
Ê Type setup.bat to start the batch program.
Ê Reboot the managed server when the batch program has executed.
iRMC S2/S3
95
Using AVR
Adjusting the settings on the managed server using the Windows Start
menu and the context menu
Proceed as follows to adjust the mouse pointer:
Ê Choose
Start - Settings - Control Panel - Printers and Other Hardware - Mouse and
choose the Pointer Options tab.
This opens the following window:
Figure 33: Mouse Properties - Pointer Options
Ê Set the Pointer Speed to a medium value.
Ê Disable the Enhance Pointer Precision option.
Ê Click the [OK] button to save the settings.
96
iRMC S2/S3
Using AVR
Proceed as follows to adjust the hardware acceleration:
Ê Right-click on the desktop background.
Ê In the context menu that appears, choose:
Properties - Settings tab, Advanced button, and the Troubleshooting tab.
This opens the following window:
Figure 34: Properties - ... - Troubleshooting: Hardware acceleration
Ê Set the Hardware Acceleration to a value as shown in figure 34.
Ê Click the [OK] button to save the settings.
iRMC S2/S3
97
Using AVR
5.2.5.3
Managed Linux server:
Adjusting the settings for synchronization of the mouse pointers
Prerequisite: The managed server is running under one of the following Linux
operating systems:
–
–
–
–
–
Red Hat 4.x
Red Hat 5.x
Suse 9.x
Suse 10.x
Suse 11.x
Different graphical user interfaces (GUIs) are available for Suse Linux and
Redhat Linux. The most important GUIs are:
– Gnome
– KDE
You can adjust the mouse pointer synchronization settings on the managed
server either using commands or under menu guidance.
You must adjust the following settings:
– Mouse motion acceleration = 1
– Mouse motion threshold =1
You can make all the settings for the managed server either directly at the
managed server or from the remote workstation over AVR.
Adjusting temporary settings on the managed server using commands
Use the xset command to make the settings for Pointer acceleration and Pointer
threshold (recommended values: 1 in each case) for the duration of the current
session.
Command syntax:
xset m(ouse)][acceleration][threshold]
Proceed as follows:
Ê Call a command line tool.
Ê Run the command xset with the following arguments:
xset m 1 1
98
iRMC S2/S3
Using AVR
Adjusting permanent settings on the managed server using a
configuration file (KDE)
You make permanent settings as follows for KDE:
Ê Change the settings in the text file /root/.kde/share/config/kcminputrc as
follows:
[Mouse]
Acceleration=1
Threshold=1
I It is not necessary to set the values again after rebooting the server.
Adjusting the permanent settings on the managed server under menu
guidance
I It is not necessary to set the values again after rebooting the server.
You make permanent settings as follows for KDE:
I The procedure for KDE described below only applies to Suse Linux.
Ê Choose
N - Control Center - Peripheral - Mouse - Advanced tab
The Mouse - Control Center window opens:
Figure 35: Mouse Control Center window
iRMC S2/S3
99
Using AVR
Ê Set the following values in the Mouse Control Center window:
– Pointer acceleration: 1.0x (minimum value)
– Pointer threshold: 20 pixels (maximum value)
Ê Save the settings.
Ê Reboot the managed server.
I It is not necessary to set the values again after rebooting the server.
You make permanent settings as follows for Gnome:
Ê Call the gconf-editor editor under the shell.
Ê Choose: desktop - gnome - peripherals - mouse
Ê Modify the following attribute values:
motion_acceleration 1
motion_threshold 1
100
iRMC S2/S3
Menus of the AVR window
5.3
Menus of the AVR window
The menu bar of the AVR window contains the following menus:
– The Extras menu allows you to control the AVR session. You can also make
a virtual keyboard available.
– You can set up and clear remote storage connections with the Remote Storage
menu.
– The Power Control menu allows you to power the server up/down or to reboot
the server.
– The Languages menu allows you to set the language (German/English) used
to display the AVR menus and dialogs.
– The Preferences menu allows you to configure the mouse, keyboard and
logging settings.
iRMC S2/S3
101
Menus of the AVR window
5.3.1
Extras menu
You can select the following functions in the Extras menu:
Figure 36: AVR window - Extras menu
Virtual Keyboard ...
The Virtual Keyboard window opens (see figure 31 on page 92).
Update local monitor state
Refreshes the display of the local monitor state.
Turn local monitor on
Switches on the local monitor of the managed server.
I This function is disabled in the following cases, even if the local
monitor is switched off:
– you are in view-only mode,
– A high-resolution graphics mode is set on the managed server
(see table 3 on page 86).
Local monitor <status> display:
Local Monitor always off
102
iRMC S2/S3
Menus of the AVR window
Turn local monitor off
Switches off the local monitor of the managed server.
I This function is disabled in the following cases, even if the local
monitor is switched on:
– you are in view-only mode,
– When AVR was started, the Local Monitor Off option was not
enabled under Local Monitor (see page 306).
Local monitor <status> display:
Local Monitor always on
Refresh Screen
Refreshes the AVR window.
Take Full Control...
Switch to full-control mode. (This function is disabled if you are already
in full-control mode.)
I An already existing full-control session will be notified by the
notified. If the currently existing full-control session refuses your
attempt to take full control, your session will remain in view-only
mode.
iRMC S2/S3
103
Menus of the AVR window
Disconnect Session...
Terminate another AVR session.
I It is only possible to terminate other AVR sessions with
Disconnect Session. To terminate your own session, choose Exit.
A list of current AVR sessions appears:
Figure 37: Extras menu - Disconnect Session
Ê Select the AVR session that you wish to terminate.
Ê Click OK to confirm that you want to terminate the selected AVR
session.
Ê Click Cancel if you do not want to terminate the selected AVR session.
Relinquish Full Control...
Switch to view-only mode. (This function is disabled if you are already in
view-only mode.)
Exit
Terminate your own AVR session.
104
iRMC S2/S3
Menus of the AVR window
5.3.2
Remote Storage menu
You call the remote storage functionality under Remote Storage:
Figure 38: AVR window - Remote Storage menu
Remote Storage...
Click Remote Storage... to open the Storage Devices window (see
page 115). This window allows you to attach or detach media on the
remote workstation as Remote Storage devices (see chapter "Remote
Storage" on page 111).
iRMC S2/S3
105
Menus of the AVR window
5.3.3
Power Control menu
The Power Control menu allows you to power the server up/down or to reboot the
server:
Figure 39: AVR window - Power Control menu
Power On
Switches the server on.
Power Off
Powers the server down, regardless of the status of the operating
system.
Power Cycle
Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a
configured period. You can configure this time in the Power Cycle Delay
field of the ASR&R Options group (see page 234).
Press Power Button
Depending on the operating system installed and the action configured,
you can trigger various actions by briefly pressing the power-off button.
These actions could be shutting down the computer or switching it to
standby mode or sleep mode.
Reset
Completely restarts the server (cold start), regardless of the status of the
operating system.
106
iRMC S2/S3
Menus of the AVR window
Pulse NMI
Initiates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). A NMI is a processor interrupt
that cannot be ignored by standard interrupt masking techniques in the
system.
Graceful Reboot
Graceful shutdown and reboot.
This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and
signed onto the iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
Graceful Shutdown
Graceful shutdown and power off.
This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and
signed onto the iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
5.3.4
Languages menu
From the Languages menu, choose the language in which the menus and dialog
boxes of the AVR window are to be shown:
Figure 40: AVR window - Languages menu
iRMC S2/S3
107
Menus of the AVR window
5.3.5
Preferences menu
The Preferences menu allows you to configure the mouse mode, keyboard layout,
global logging, low bandwidth, and the internal TCP port:
Figure 41: AVR window - Preferences menu
I If Video Redirection is executed in the Num Lock On mode on the server
side, the client side also turns to Num Lock ON.
Mouse Synch On Mode Change
Default: Enabled.
Specifies whether or not mouse pointer synchronization should be kept
up after changing the Mouse Mode (see below).
Mouse Mode
Specifies the mouse mode (Hide Mode (Relative), Absolute Mode or
Relative Mode).
Depending on the server operating system, you must make the following
settings:
– Windows: Absolute Mode, Hide Mode (Relative) or Relative Mode
– Linux: Hide Mode (Relative) or Relative Mode
I Default setting: Absolute Mode
108
iRMC S2/S3
Menus of the AVR window
Keyboard Layout
Specifies the keyboard layout for the virtual console.
I The keyboard layout at the managed server must also be set
accordingly, i.e. the keyboard layout settings of AVR client and
AVR server must be identical.
Global Logging
Default: No global logging.
Specifies whether global logging is to be carried out.
I Global logging must be disabled, i.e. None must be set!
Console Log File
Specifies the log file for global logging.
I Depending on your selection under Global Logging, this option
may be disabled.
Low Bandwidth
In the case of a reduced data transfer rate, you can configure here a
lower bandwidth (bits per pixel, bpp) in terms of color depth for your all
AVR sessions at the same iRMC S2/S3.
None
Default.
No lower bandwidth.
3 bpp
3 bpp color depth (8 colors).
8 bpp
8 bpp color depth (256 colors).
Internal TCP Port
Default: 5901
Specifies the internal TCP port for the integrated Remote Storage Client
used at the AVR Client.
iRMC S2/S3
109
6
Remote Storage
I A valid license key is required to use the Remote Storage function.
Remote Storage makes available to the managed server a “virtual” drive which
is located elsewhere in the network. Up to two media can be redirected.
You can provide the source for the virtual drive as follows:
– Via a remote storage connection as a physical drive or image file at the
remote workstation using the AVR Java applet (see page 113) via a remote
connection:
Figure 42: Remote storage via a remote connection
– As a CD/DVD ISO image file centrally in the network via a Remote Storage
server (see page 127):
Figure 43: Remote storage via a Remote Storage Server
iRMC S2/S3
111
I Parallel remote storage connections:
The following are possible concurrently:
– either up to two Remote Storage connections to virtual drives at the
remote workstation (if the connection is established over the AVR
Java applet)
or
– one Remote Storage connection to a Remote Storage server.
It is not possible to establish concurrent Remote Storage connections via
an applet and via the Remote Storage server.
I The Remote Storage page of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface allows you to
obtain information on the status of the current remote storage
connections and establish the connection to a Remote Storage server
(see page 312).
112
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
6.1
Providing remote storage at the remote
workstation
If you provide the source for a virtual drive on the remote workstation then the
remote storage functionality supports the following device types:
–
–
–
–
Floppy
CD ISO image
DVD ISO image
CD, DVD
I Optical storage media (CD, DVD) are automatically displayed (offered for
selection). Other remote storage media must be made available as
remote storage by manually selecting the appropriate device type.
I Devices connected as remote storage are recognized as the USB
connected devices by the iRMC S2/S3. They cannot be used if no USB
connection is available (e.g. no USB driver exists).
You can use the virtual drive to install an operating system on your PRIMERGY
server from the remote workstation (see chapter "Remote installation of the
operating system via iRMC S2/S3" on page 371).
This section provides information on the following topics:
– Starting Remote Storage
– Provision of storage media for Remote Storage
– Connecting storage media as remote storage
– Clearing Remote Storage connections
– Removing media made available for Remote Storage
iRMC S2/S3
113
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
6.1.1
Starting Remote Storage
You start the Remote Storage function using the AVR Java applet (see section
"Advanced Video Redirection - Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on
page 302).
Ê Start the iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see section "Logging into the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface" on page 136).
Ê Open the Advanced Video Redirection page and click on the Start Video
Redirection, button to start Advanced Video Redirection (see section
"Advanced Video Redirection - Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on
page 302).
This opens the AVR window.
Ê In the menu bar in the AVR window, choose:
Remote Storage - Remote Storage...
Figure 44: AVR window - Remote Storage - Remote Storage...
The Storage Devices dialog box opens, containing the storage media currently
available for Remote Storage.
114
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
“Storage Devices” dialog box on a Windows system
Figure 45: Storage Devices dialog box
I When a storage medium is inserted in an optical drive (CD ROM, DVD
ROM) the contents are displayed automatically.
Floppy disk drives and CD ROM / DVD ROM drives are not displayed in
the list unless a medium is inserted.
If a storage medium is inserted, but its contents are not displayed, the
storage medium is reserved by the local explorer.
iRMC S2/S3
115
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
“Storage Devices” dialog box on a Linux system
Figure 46: Storage Devices dialog box
I Physical storage media must be mounted to allow them to be connected
as Remote Storage devices. Mounted storage media are automatically
displayed in the Storage Devices dialog box.
116
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
6.1.2
Provision of storage media for emote Storage
Ê In the Storage Devices dialog box, click Add... .
The Add Storage Device dialog box opens.
“Add Storage Device” dialog box on a Windows system
Figure 47: Add Storage Device dialog box (Windows)
“Add Storage Device” dialog box on a Linux system
Figure 48: Add Storage Device dialog box (Linux)
iRMC S2/S3
117
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
Ê In the Add Storage Device dialog box, navigate to the directory of the remote
storage medium that you want to make available for remote storage from
your remote workstation.
Ê Select the required device type under Storage Type.
The following storage types can be selected:
– Floppy
– CD ISO image
– DVD ISO image
I Physical storage devices must be mounted on Linux systems.
Ê Specify the storage medium you wish to connect as Remote Storage under
File Name:
– In the case of an ISO image (ISO/NRG image), enter the file name.
Alternatively, click on the file name in the Explorer.
– In the case of a drive, enter the name of the drive, e.g.
– “D” for drive D (Windows)
– /dev/... (Linux)
“Add Storage Device” dialog: Selecting the storage medium (Windows)
Figure 49: Add Storage Device dialog: Selecting the storage medium
118
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
“Add Storage Device” dialog: Selecting the storage medium (Linux)
Figure 50: Add Storage Device dialog: Selecting the storage medium
Ê Click Select to confirm your selection.
The selected storage medium is made available for Remote Storage and
displayed in the Storage Devices dialog.
Display in the “Storage Devices” dialog (Windows)
Figure 51: Storage Devices dialog: The provided storage medium is displayed.
iRMC S2/S3
119
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
Display in the “Storage Devices” dialog (Linux)
Figure 52: Storage Devices dialog: The provided storage medium is displayed.
120
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
6.1.3
Connecting storage media as remote storage
Ê In the Storage Devices dialog (see figure 51 and figure 52 on page 120), click
the storage medium that you want to connect as Remote Storage.
Ê Click Connect to connect the selected storage medium as Remote Storage.
The Storage Devices dialog opens with the message regarding safe removal.
The storage medium is connected as Remote Storage.
I If you wish to connect two storage devices as Remote Storage at the
same time, a confirmation dialog box is displayed before the
connection is established (see section "Connecting two storage
devices as Remote Storage at the same time" on page 123).
Storage Devices dialog: Showing Remote Storage connection (Windows)
Figure 53: Storage Devices dialog: The storage medium is connected as Remote Storage.
iRMC S2/S3
121
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
Storage Devices dialog: Showing Remote Storage connection (Linux)
Figure 54: Storage Devices dialog: The storage medium is connected as Remote Storage.
122
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
Connecting two storage devices as Remote Storage at the same time
I The example in the following section illustrates how to simultaneously
connect two storage media as Remote Storage on a Windows system.
The same procedure applies for Linux systems.
In figure 55, you can see that two storage devices have been provided as
Remote Storage:
Figure 55: Storage Devices dialog: Connecting 2 storage devices as Remote Storage
Ê Select the two storage devices and click Connect to connect the storage
devices as Remote Storage.
The system then makes a proposal regarding the assignment of your
storage devices to USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 (see figure 55 on page 123).
iRMC S2/S3
123
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
Figure 56: Connection Type dialog: Assignment to USB 1.1 and USB 2.0
Ê Click Swap if you want to swap the assignment of the storage devices to
USB 1.1 and USB 2.0.
Figure 57: Connection Type dialog: Assignment to USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 swapped
Ê Click OK to connect the storage devices as Remote Storage.
124
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
6.1.4
Clearing Remote Storage connections
I The Remote Storage connection is automatically released when the AVR
session is disconnected.
Ê Open the Storage Devices dialog (see section "Starting Remote Storage" on
page 114).
The list of storage media connected as Remote Storage is displayed (using
Windows in the example).
Figure 58: Storage Devices dialog: Clearing Remote Storage connections
Ê “Safely remove” the storage device, i.e. ensure that no more
applications/programs are accessing the storage media.
Ê Click Disconnect to clear all Remote Storage connections.
iRMC S2/S3
125
Providing remote storage at the remote workstation
6.1.5
Removing the storage medium
Remove a storage medium from the list of media available for Remote Storage
as follows:
Ê Open the Storage Devices dialog (see section "Starting Remote Storage" on
page 114).
The list of storage media available for Remote Storage is displayed (using
Windows in the example):
Figure 59: Storage Devices dialog: Removing a Remote Storage medium
Ê Select the storage medium you want to remove.
Ê Click Remove... to remove the storage medium.
126
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
6.2
Providing remote storage via a Remote
Storage server
You can use a Remote Storage server to provide an image file (ISO/NRG
image) as remote storage for any number of PRIMERGY servers that can be
administered via iRMC S2/S3. You can use this image file to boot one or more
PRIMERGY servers from the remote workstation (see chapter "Remote
installation of the operating system via iRMC S2/S3" on page 371).
The Remote Storage server is available for Windows systems
I The Remote Storage server is available in a 32-bit and 64-bit variant for
Windows. The 32-bit and 64-bit versions of the Remote Storage server
must not be installed at the same time on 64-bitsystems.
I You will find the individual variants of the Remote Storage server on your
ServerView Suite DVD 1 under
SVSoftware\Software\RemoteView\iRMC
Making the ISO image available to the PRIMERGY Server via Remote
Storage
The following requirements must be satisfied if your PRIMERGY server is to use
the image file made available by the Remote Storage server:
– The Remote Storage server must be installed (see page 128).
– The Remote Storage server must be started (see page 133).
– The managed server’s iRMC S2/S3 must be connected to the Remote
Storage server (see page 312).
Booting from WinPE 2.x-based ISO images
A PRIMERGY server running iRMC S2/S3 and a firmware version Ï 3.60A is
required to boot from a WinPE 2.x-based ISO image (e.g. Windows Server 2008
and ServerView Installation Manager).
iRMC S2/S3
127
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
6.2.1
Installing the Remote Storage server
The Remote Storage server is available in 32-bit and 64-bit versions. The 32-bit
and 64-bit versions of the Remote Storage server must not be installed at the
same time on 64-bit systems.
The installation programs RemoteStorageServer_Installer32.exe and
RemoteStorageServer_Installer64.exe for installing the Remote Storage server are
located on the ServerView Suite DVD 1 under
SVSoftware\Software\RemoteView\iRMC\Widows_32 and
SVSoftware\Software\RemoteView\iRMC\Widows_x64 respectively.
Once installation has been completed successfully, your installation directory
contains a number of files including RemoteStorageServer.exe.
128
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
6.2.2
Remote Storage server execution modes
You can execute the Remote Storage server in the following modes as required:
– as a background service
– as a stand-along program
You configure the Remote Storage server execution mode via a graphical user
interface (see page 130).
Executing the Remote Storage server as a service
The following points should be noted
– The image file can be located either on a computer in the network or on the
same host on which the Remote Storage server is running.
I If the image file is not on the computer on which the Remote Storage
server is running, you must specify the path of the image file in UNC
notation. You also need a user account with access permissions on
the image file.
– When the host on which the Remote Storage server is located is booted, the
remote storage server starts automatically. The Remote Storage server is
then executed until it is explicitly terminated or the host is shut down.
– When the host on which the Remote Storage server is located is booted, the
image file becomes available automatically.
Executing the Remote Storage server as a stand-alone program
The following points should be noted
– The image file (ISO/NRG image) may be present locally on the Remote
Storage server or on an assigned network drive.
– When the host on which the Remote Storage server is located is booted, you
must start the image file “manually”.
iRMC S2/S3
129
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
6.2.3
Configuring, starting and exiting the Remote
Storage server
You configure, start and exit the Remote Storage server via a graphical user
interface (GUI).
Calling the Remote Storage server’s raphical user interface
You call the Remote Storage server’s graphical user interface as follows:
Ê Choose Start - Programs - Fujitsu RemoteStorageServer - Remote Storage Server.
The Remote Storage server’s graphical user interface appears:
Figure 60: The Remote Storage server’s graphical user interface (here in the “Idle” state)
130
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
Configuring the Remote Storage server
I Configuration is only possible if the Remote Storage server is in the “idle”
state, i.e. it is not being executed.
In the graphical user interface, you specify the image file made available as
remote storage together with other parameters:
ISO Image Path and Filename:
Ê Enter the path and name of the image file directly in the field.
or:
Ê Click the Browse... button and then navigate to and select the required
image file in the Choose a file dialog which now opens and then
confirm.
I If the Remote Storage server is to run as a service (see the Run
as Service option on page 132) and the image file is located on a
computer in the network, you must specify the path of the image
file in UNC notation. You must also ensure that the account
entered under Log On As User (see page 132) is valid and has
access permissions on the share on which the image file is
located.
Force Using Port
If you have configured a port number other than the default port number
(5901) for the iRMC S2/S3’s remote storage port (see page 248), then
you must activate this option and enter the configured port number in the
associated field.
Force Using IP Address
If the host on which the Remote Storage server is executed possesses
more than one LAN connection:
You can specify the IP address of the LAN connection that is to be used
for the Remote Storage server if this is executed as a service.
By default, the Remote Storage server uses the first detected LAN
connection.
iRMC S2/S3
131
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
Run as Service
Activate this option if the Remote Storage server is to be executed as a
service in the background (see page 129).
Ê Select one of the two options below:
Use Local System Account
The Remote Storage server is executed as a service under the
local system account.
In this event, the image file (ISO/NRG image) must be located
on a local drive.
Log On As User
he Remote Storage server is executed under the user account
that you specify in the following input fields.
Specify the user name in the form:
– For local users: .\Logon-Name
– For domain users:
DOMAIN\LogOnName
or
LogOnName@DOMAIN<mailto:LogOnName@DOMAIN>
I The image file (ISO/NRG image) can be located on a network
drive if the Log On As User option is enabled. In this event, the
specified account must have access permissions on the
network drive on which the image file is located. You must also
specify the image file in UNC notation (see input field ISO
Image Path or Filename on page 131).
Ê Click the Apply button to activate your settings.
132
iRMC S2/S3
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
Starting the Remote Storage server
Ê Click the Start button to start the Remote Storage server as a service or as
a stand-alone program:
Figure 61: The Remote Storage server is executed (“Running” status)
Status Messages:
The logged execution states of the Remote Storage server are displayed
here.
I If the Run as service execution mode is configured (see page 132), then
the Remote Storage server is started automatically when the computer
on which the Remote Storage server is installed is booted.
I Execution of the Remote Storage server is not interrupted automatically
if the graphical user interface is exited.
Exiting the Remote Storage server
Ê Click the Stop button to terminate execution of the Remote Storage server.
iRMC S2/S3
133
Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server
134
iRMC S2/S3
7
iRMC S2/S3 web interface
The iRMC S2/S3 not only has its own operating system, but also acts as a web
server, providing its own interface. You can choose whether to show the menus
and dialog boxes of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface in German, English or
Japanese.
When you enter values in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface, you often receive
assistance in the form of tool tips.
I The software described below is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
iRMC S2/S3
135
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
7.1
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
Ê Open a web browser on the remote workstation and enter the (configured)
DNS name (see page 249) or IP address of the iRMC S2/S3.
Different login screens appear depending on whether LDAP access to a
directory service has been configured for the iRMC S2/S3 (LDAP enabled
option, see page 274):
I If no login screen appears, check the LAN connection (see section
"Testing the LAN interface" on page 47).
– LDAP access to the directory service is not configured for the
iRMC S2/S3 (LDAP enabled option is not activated) and Always use SSL
Login option (see page 274) is not activated:
Figure 62: Login screen for the iRMC S2/S3 web interface (LDAP access not
configured and the “Always use SSL login” option is not selected)
Ê Type in the data for the default administrator account.
User name: admin
Password: admin
I Both the User name and the Password are case-sensitive.
For reasons of security, it is recommended that you create a
new administrator account once you have logged in, and then
delete the default administrator account or at least change the
password for the account (see "User “<name>” Configuration
- User configuration (details)" on page 266).
Ê Click OK to confirm your entries.
136
iRMC S2/S3
Logging into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
– LDAP access to the directory service is configured for the iRMC S2/S3
(LDAP enabled option is activated) or Always use SSL Login option is
activated):
Figure 63: Login screen for the iRMC S2/S3 web interface (LDAP access configured)
I The user name and password are always SSL-protected when
they are transmitted. If you activate the Secure (SSL) option, all
communication between the web browser and the iRMC S2/S3 is
carried out over HTTPS.
Ê Type in the data for the default administrator account.
User name: admin
Password: admin
I For reasons of security, it is recommended that you create a
new administrator account once you have logged in, and then
delete the default administrator account or at least change the
password for the account (see "User “<name>” Configuration
- User configuration (details)" on page 266).
Ê Click Login to confirm your entries.
The iRMC S2/S3 web interface opens showing the System Information page (see
page 146).
iRMC S2/S3
137
Required user permissions
7.2
Required user permissions
table 4 provides an overview of the permissions which are required in order to
use the individual functions available at the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
X
X
Switch identification LED on/off.
X
X
X
X
Set Asset Tag Configuration.
Edit Operating System Informations
Remote Storage Enabled
X
Video Redirection Enabled
User
X
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Operator
Open the System Overview page.
Required
iRMC S2/S3specific
permission
Configure User Accounts
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Functions in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
X
1)
X
Open the System Component Information page.
X
X
X
X
X
Reset Memory Error Counter.
View SPD Data.
X
X
X
X
Open the Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter
Settings page.2)
X
X
X
X
Edit Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Param. Settings2)
X
X
X
X
Open the BIOS Update Settings page.
2)
X
X
Perform BIOS update 2)
X
X
Open the iRMC S2/S3 Information page.
X
X
Reboot iRMC S2/S3.
X
X
X
X
X
Load license key onto the iRMC S2/S3.
X
Set Miscellaneous Options
X
Open the Save iRMC S2/S3 FW Settings page.
X
X
Table 4: Permissions to use special the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
138
iRMC S2/S3
Required user permissions
Select Include User Settings.
Remote Storage Enabled
Video Redirection Enabled
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Required
iRMC S2/S3specific
permission
Configure User Accounts
User
Operator
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Functions in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
X
X
Select any other setting option(s).
X
Import iRMC S2/S3 settings in WinSCU XML format from
file.
X
Open/edit the Certificate Upload page.
X
Open/edit the Generate a self-signed RSA Cert. page
X
Open iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update page.
X
X
Set firmware selector.
X
X
X
X
Perform Firmware Update from File.
X
Update firmware via TFTP (iRMC S2/S3 TFTP Settings).
X
Open Power On/Off page.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Modify Boot Options.
X
Use Power Control.
Open/edit the Power Options page.
X
Open Power Supply Info page.
X
Open/edit Power Consumption Configuration page
X
Open Current Power Consumption page2)
X
2)
Open/edit Power Consumption History page .
X
Open Fans page.
X
X
X
X
Start fan test (Fan Test group).
X
X
X
X
Set Fan Check Time (Fan Test group).
X
Table 4: Permissions to use special the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
iRMC S2/S3
139
Required user permissions
Select individual Fans (System Fans group).
X
Set Fan Fail Action / Delay Time.
X
Open Temperature page
X
X
X
Remote Storage Enabled
X
Define action on critical temperature.
X
Open Voltages page.
X
X
X
X
Open Power Supply page.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Configure power supply redundancy
Open Component Status page.
Video Redirection Enabled
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Required
iRMC S2/S3specific
permission
Configure User Accounts
User
Operator
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Functions in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
X
Open System Event Log Content page.
X
X
X
Clear the system event log (SEL).
X
X
X
Save event log (SEL).
X
X
X
X
Define the severity for the display of SEL entries
X
X
X
X
Open Internal Event Log Content page.
X
X
Clear the internal event log (iEL).
X
X
Save event log (iEL)
X
X
Define the severity for the display of SEL entries
X
X
Open Event Log Configuration page.
X
X
X
X
Edit System Event Log Configuration settings.
X
Edit Internal Event Log Configuration settings.
X
Open/edit Server Management Info. page.
X
Open/edit the Network Interface page.
X
Table 4: Permissions to use special the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
140
iRMC S2/S3
Required user permissions
Open/edit the Ports and Netw. Services page.
X
Open/edit DNS Configuration page.
X
Open/edit SNMP TRAP Alerting page.
X
Open/edit Serial / Modem Alerting page.
X
Open/edit the Email Alerting page.
Remote Storage Enabled
X
Open/edit the iRMC S2/S3 User page.
X
Open/edit the Directory Service Config. page.
X
Open CAS Configuration page
X
Edit CAS Generic Configuration
X
X
X
Edit CAS User Privilege and Permissions
Open the BIOS Text Console page.
Video Redirection Enabled
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Required
iRMC S2/S3specific
permission
Configure User Accounts
User
Operator
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Functions in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
X
X
X
X
Start Console Redirection.
X
X
X
X
Logon in window for power mgmt & text console red.
X
X
Start the text console (Enter Console).
X
X
Modify the BIOS Console Redirection Options.
X
Open/edit the Advanced Video Redirection page.
X
Open/edit the Remote Storage page.
X
Start iRMC S2/S3 SSH Access.
X
X
X
X
SSH login
X
X
X
X
Start iRMC S2/S3 Telnet Access.
X
X
X
X
Telnet login
X
X
X
X
Table 4: Permissions to use special the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
iRMC S2/S3
141
Required user permissions
1)
Action is only possible if no agents are running.
2)
Feature is not available on all systems.
Remote Storage Enabled
Video Redirection Enabled
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Required
iRMC S2/S3specific
permission
Configure User Accounts
User
Operator
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Functions in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
Table 4: Permissions to use special the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
142
iRMC S2/S3
Structure of the user interface
7.3
Structure of the user interface
The iRMC S2/S3 web interface is structured as follows:
Selected function
Interface language selector
Navigation area
Title bar
Logout button
Working area
Figure 64: Structure of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
iRMC S2/S3
143
Structure of the user interface
Choosing the language for the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
On the right of the black bar above the work area, you will find a flag icon. Click
this icon to choose the language (German / English / Japanese) used to display
the navigation area, menus and dialog boxes of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
Navigation area
The navigation area contains the menu tree structure whose nodes combine the
links to the individual iRMC S2/S3 functions arranged on a task basis. When you
click one of these links (in figure 64: System Overview), the link is enabled and the
work area for that function is displayed showing any output, dialog boxes,
options, links and buttons.
Below the links to the individual iRMC S2/S3 functions, you will find the links
Logout and Refresh:
●
Logout allows you to terminate the iRMC S2/S3 session after you have
confirmed this in a dialog box. Different login screens appear after the
session has been closed depending on whether LDAP access to a directory
service has been configured for the iRMC S2/S3 (LDAP enabled option, see
page 274):
– If LDAP access to the directory service is not configured for the
iRMC S2/S3 (LDAP enabled is not activated) and then Always use SSL login
option (see page 274) is deactivated, the following login screen appears:
Figure 65: Login page (after logging out)
144
iRMC S2/S3
Structure of the user interface
Click Login to open the login screen of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
(see figure 62 on page 136). This allows you to log in again if you wish.
– If LDAP access to the directory service is configured for the iRMC S2/S3
(LDAP enabled option is activated) or the Always use SSL login option (see
page 274) is deactivated, the appropriate login screen appears (see
figure 63 on page 137).
●
Click Refresh to refresh the contents of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
I Alternatively, you can configure the interface to automatically update
the contents periodically (see "Enable Auto Refresh" on page 246).
iRMC S2/S3
145
System Information - Information on the server
7.4
System Information Information on the server
The System Information entry contains the links to the following pages:
– "System Overview - General information on the server" on page 147
– "System Component Information - Information on the server components"
on page 152
146
iRMC S2/S3
System Information - Information on the server
7.4.1
System Overview General information on the server
The System Overview page provides information on
–
–
–
–
–
the system status,
system (general information)
the operating system of the managed server,
system FRUs (Field Replaceable Units) / IDPROM.
current overall power consumption of the managed server
In addition, the System Overview page allows you to enter a customer-specific
asset tag for the managed server.
Figure 66: System Overview page
iRMC S2/S3
147
System Information - Information on the server
System Status
The status of the global error LED, the CSS LED and the identification LED are
shown under System Status. You can also switch the PRIMERGY identification
LED on and off.
Figure 67: System Overview page - System Status
Power LED
Power status of the server.
The following statuses are possible:
– On: “Power ON” (green)
– On: “Standby mode (green) with text “Suspend to RAM (Standby)”.
– Off: “Power OFF” (orange)
Error LED
Informs about the server‘s Global Error LED:
Status Info
(iRMC S2/S3)
Global Error LED
on the Server
Status of the servers
off
does not light up.
No critical event.
on
lights red.
Prefailure event for a non CSS component.
blinking
flashes red.
Critical event.
CSS LED
Informs about the server’s CSS (Customer Self Service) LED:
148
Status Info
(iRMC S2/S3)
CSS LED on the
Server
Status of the server
off
does not light up.
The server is operational.
on
lights orange.
Prefailure event for a CSS component.
blinking
flashes orange.
Defective CSS component.
iRMC S2/S3
System Information - Information on the server
Identify LED
Server identifier.
The following statuses are possible:
– On (blue)
– Off (grey)
Turn On/Turn Off
Click Turn On / Turn Off to toggle the PRIMERGY identification
LED on and off.
Asset Tag Configuration
Under Asset Tag Configuration, you can enter a customer-specific asset tag for
the managed server.
I The customer-specific asset tag allows you to assign the server an
inventory number or other identifier of your choice.
With Windows-based systems, this customer-specific asset tag is
provided automatically by the WMI (Windows Management
Instrumentation). It can then be evaluated by in-house tools or used for
integration in enterprise management systems (such as CA Unicenter).
Figure 68: The System Overview - System Status page
System Asset Tag
You can enter the asset tag here.
Ê Click Apply to accept the asset tag.
iRMC S2/S3
149
System Information - Information on the server
System Information
System Information lists information on the managed server.
Figure 69: System Overview page - System Information
Operating System Information
Operating System Information lists information on the operating system of the
managed server.
Figure 70: System Overview page - Operating System Information
I If no ServerView agents are running, you can edit the System Location and
System contact fields, otherwise these fields are not editable.
After the ServerView agents have been started, your initial values will be
overwritten by the values automatically detected by the agents.
150
iRMC S2/S3
System Information - Information on the server
System FRU / IDPROM Information
Information on the FRUs (Field Replaceable Units) is listed under
System FRU/IDPROM Information. FRUs are system components that can be
released and removed from the system. The CSS Component column indicates
for each of the components whether the CSS (Customer Self Service)
functionality is supported.
Figure 71: System Overview page - System FRU / IDPROM Information
Current Overall Power Consumption
I This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.
Figure 72: System Overview page - Current Overall Power Consumption
Under Current Overall Power Consumption you can see all the measurements
current, minimum, maximum and average power consumption for the server in
the current interval.
A graphical display also shows the current power consumption of the server
compared with the maximum possible power consumption.
iRMC S2/S3
151
System Information - Information on the server
7.4.2
System Component Information Information on the server components
The System Component Information page provides information on the CPU and
the main memory modules. The CSS Component column indicates for each of the
components whether the CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is
supported.
The following status icons indicate the possible statuses of the system
components:
OK: Component status is okay.
Component slot is empty.
Warning: The status of the component has deteriorated.
Fault: The component has a fault.
Table 5: Status of the system component
152
iRMC S2/S3
System Information - Information on the server
Figure 73: System Component Information page
I On PRIMERGY servers with support for TPM (Trusted Platform Module),
this page indicates whether TPM is enabled or disabled.
System CPU Information
This group provides information on the status, IDs, CSS capability and
performance of the CPU(s) in the managed PRIMERGY server.
iRMC S2/S3
153
System Information - Information on the server
System Memory Information
This group provides information on the status, IDs, CSS capability and
performance of the main memory modules in the managed PRIMERGY server.
Select
Here you can select individual memory modules to which the action you
select under Please select memory action from list is to be applied.
Select all
Selects all memory modules.
Deselect all
Cancels your selection.
Please select memory action from list
This list allows you to select an action to be applied to the selected
memory modules.
Apply to the selected modules
Applies the selected action to the selected memory modules.
View SPD Data / No SPD Data
Clicking the toggle button View SPD Data / No SPD Data shows or hides
vendor-specific details (Serial Presence Detect (SPD) data) for the
individual memory components.
The SPD data for a memory component is stored in an EEPROM
integrated in the component and serves to allow the BIOS to
automatically detect this memory component (RAM, DIMM).
154
iRMC S2/S3
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
7.5
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings,
flashing BIOS
The BIOS entry contains the links to the following pages:
– "Backup/Restoration - Saving/Restoring BIOS single parameter settings
to/from a file" on page 155
– "BIOS - Updating BIOS via "upload from file" or via TFTP" on page 159
I These pages are only displayed if the BIOS of the managed server
supports the corresponding feature requirements.
7.5.1
Backup/Restoration - Saving/Restoring BIOS
single parameter settings to/from a file
The Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page provides you with
the following options:
– Back up single BIOS parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format and
save the backup to a file.
– Restore single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView® WinSCU XML
format from a file.
Figure 74: Backup/Restoration of BIOS Single Parameter Settings page
iRMC S2/S3
155
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
7.5.1.1
Backing up single BIOS parameters in ServerView® WinSCU
XML format
The Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format group
allows you to back up single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView® WinSCU
XML format and to save the backup to a file.
Figure 75: Backup BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format
Backup Status
Displays the status of the current backup process. Successful completion
is indicated by "Operation Successful". The Backup Status is only
displayed if a backup is currently in process or has completed.
You can clear the status display by clicking the Clear Status button, which
is only available if a status is currently displayed.
Clear Status
Clears the status information indicated under Backup Status. This button
is only available if a status is currently displayed under Backup Status.
Backup Filename
This input field is disabled ("grayed out") by default. Initially, it displays the
file name that is dynamically generated by the iRMC S2/S3.
Edit Filename
Enables the Backup Filename field, thus allowing you to enter a file
name (.pre) of your choice.
Save Filename
Saves the edited file name, which, starting from now, will be the
name displayed by default in the Backup Filename field.
156
iRMC S2/S3
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
Request BIOS Parameter Backup
Initiates a backup of single BIOS parameter settings in ServerView®
WinSCU XML format. The backup (with the name specified in the
Backup Filename field) is stored locally on the iRMC S2/S3.
Once the backup process has started, the current process status is
displayed under Backup Status.
I Notes on the backup process:
– During the backup process, all buttons and input fields are
disabled.
– If powered off, the managed server will be automatically
powered on.
– If the server is powered on, a reboot is required. Otherwise, the
backup process will remain in state "Boot Pending".
– The managed server is powered off after the backup has
completed.
Save Backup to File
Opens a browser dialog allowing you to save the iRMC S2/S3-local copy
of the BIOS backup data to a file (<name -of-your-choice>.pre).
This button is only displayed when a backup of single BIOS parameters
in ServerView® WinSCU XML format is available in the local store of the
iRMC S2/S3.
7.5.1.2
Restoring single BIOS parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML
format
The Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format group
allows you to restore single BIOS parameter settings from a restoration file in
ServerView® WinSCU XML format.
Figure 76: Restoration BIOS Single Parameters in ServerView® WinSCU XML format
iRMC S2/S3
157
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
Restoration Status
Displays the status of the current restoration process. Successful
completion is indicated by "Operation successful". The Restoration Status
is only displayed if a restoration is currently in process or has completed.
You can clear the status display by clicking the Clear Status button, which
is only available if a status is currently displayed.
Clear Status
Clears the status information indicated under Restoration Status. This
button is only displayed if a status is currently indicated under
Restoration Status.
Restoration File
Clicking the input field or clicking Browse... opens a browser dialog
allowing you to navigate to a file (.pre) containing a backup of single BIOS
parameters in the ServerView® WinSCU XML format.
Apply
Initiates the restoration of single BIOS parameter settings based on the
file specified in the Restoration File field.
Once the restoration process has started, the current process status is
indicated under Restoration Status.
I Notes on the restoration process:
– During the restoration process, all buttons and input fields are
disabled.
– If powered off, the managed server will automatically be
powered on.
– If the managed server is powered on, the server is to be
rebooted. Otherwise the restoration process will remain in
state "Boot Pending".
– The managed server is powered off after the restoration has
completed.
158
iRMC S2/S3
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
7.5.2
BIOS - Updating BIOS via "upload from file" or via
TFTP
The BIOS Update Settings page provides information on the current BIOS version
on the managed server and allows you to update the BIOS via "upload from file"
or via TFTP.
I You will find the appropriate BIOS image for your PRIMERGY server on
ServerView Suite DVD 1 or you can download it under
http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/com/support/downloads.html.
Figure 77: BIOS Update Settings page
iRMC S2/S3
159
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
Updating (flashing) the BIOS - course of events and important notes
The following overview applies for both updating the BIOS via "upload from file"
and updating the BIOS via TFTP.
I Details on how to initiate the steps described in this overview are
described below in this section.
I During the complete update process, the current update status is
indicated in the BIOS Update Settings page.
Figure 78: Updating BIOS - (TFTP) download successfully finished
Updating the BIOS comprises the following steps:
1. In the first step, you download the update file.
I The update file must be a UPC file.
After the update file has been downloaded, the following occurs:
– If the server is powered off, the server will be automatically powered on
to initiate the flash process.
– If the server is already powered on, you must restart the server to initiate
the flash process.
V CAUTION!
If a BIOS update is currently in progress, do not power-off or restart
the server.
160
iRMC S2/S3
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
2. Subsequently, flash data is transferred to memory. The status display will
indicate when the transfer has successfully completed.
3. Before the actual flashing process is started, the flash/update image is
checked.
Figure 79: Updating BIOS - checking update/flash image
4. Once the update/flash image is successfully verified, the actual flashing
process is started. The status indication shows the percentage completion
of the flash process.
5. After the BIOS update has successfully completed, the server is powered
off. The following entry is written to the system event log (SEL):
BIOS TFTP or HTTP/HTTPS flash OK
BIOS Information
This group provides information on the current BIOS version on the managed
server.
iRMC S2/S3
161
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
BIOS Upload from File
The BIOS Upload from File group allows you to perform an online update of the
BIOS on the managed server. To do this, you must provide the current BIOS
image in a file.
Figure 80: BIOS Update Settings page - BIOS Update from File
Update file
File in which the BIOS image is stored.
I A UPC-format file is required for performing the BIOS Upload from
File function.
Browse...
Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the update file.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings and to start flashing the BIOS.
V CAUTION!
If a BIOS update is currently in progress, do not power-off or restart
the server.
162
iRMC S2/S3
BIOS - Backing up/restore BIOS settings, flashing BIOS
BIOS TFTP Update Settings
The BIOS TFTP Update Settings group allows you to perform an online update of
the BIOS on the managed server. To do this, you must provide the current BIOS
image in a file on a TFTP server. The BIOS is flashed when TFTP is started.
Figure 81: BIOS Update Settings page - BIOS TFTP Update Settings
TFTP Server
IP address or DNS name of the TFTP server on which the file with the
BIOS image is stored.
Update file
File in which the BIOS image is stored.
I A UPC-format file is required for performing the BIOS TFTP Update
Settings function.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Click TFTP Test to test the connection to the TFTP server.
Ê Click TFTP Start to download the file containing the BIOS image from the
TFTP server and to start flashing the BIOS.
V CAUTION!
If a BIOS update is currently in progress, do not power-off or restart
the server.
iRMC S2/S3
163
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
7.6
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and
certificates
The iRMC S2/S3 entry contains the links to the following pages:
– "iRMC S2/S3 Information - Information on the iRMC S2/S3" on page 165
– "Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings - Save firmware settings" on
page 169
– "Certificate Upload - Load the DSA/RSA certificate and private DSA/RSA
key" on page 172.
– "Generate a self-signed Certificate - Generate self-signed RSA certificate"
on page 179
– "iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update" on page 181
164
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
7.6.1
iRMC S2/S3 Information Information on the iRMC S2/S3
The iRMC S2/S3 Information page provides you with the following options:
– View information on the firmware and the SDRR version of the iRMC S2/S3,
set the firmware selector and load a firmware image and restart the
iRMC S2/S3.
– View information on the active iRMC S2/S3 sessions.
– Load license key onto the iRMC S2/S3.
– Make settings for the layout of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
Figure 82: iRMC S2/S3 Information page
iRMC S2/S3
165
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Running Firmware
Under Running Firmware, you can view information on the firmware and the
SDRR version of the iRMC S2/S3 and restart the iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 83: iRMC S2/S3 Information page - Firmware Information and iRMC S2/S3 reboot
Reboot iRMC S2/S3
Reboots the iRMC S2/S3.
I The Reboot iRMC S2/S3 button is disabled during the BIOS POST
phase of the managed server.
Active Session Information
The Active Session Information group shows all the currently active iRMC S2/S3
sessions.
Figure 84: iRMC S2/S3 Information page - Active Session Information
166
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
License Key
The License Key group allows you to load a license key onto the iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 85: iRMC S2/S3 Information page - License Key
I You require a valid license key to be able to use the iRMC S2/S3
functions Advanced Video Redirection (see page 302) and Remote Storage
(see page 312).
You can purchase the license key.
Upload
When you click this button, the license key specified in the input field is
loaded onto the iRMC S2/S3.
Miscellaneous iRMC S2/S3 Options
The Miscellaneous iRMC S2/S3 Options group allows you to make settings for the
layout of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
Figure 86: iRMC Information page - Miscellaneous Options
Default Language
Specifies the language (German / English / Japanese) that is set as
default the next time the iRMC S2/S3 web interface is called.
iRMC S2/S3
167
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Temperature Units
Specifies the unit used for displaying temperature values at the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface (degrees Celsius / degrees Fahrenheit). This
setting applies for the current session and is preset the next time the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface is called.
Colour Schema
Specifies the color scheme for displaying the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
This setting applies for the current session and is preset the next time the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface is called.
Show Video Redirection in Navigation
Adds the Video Redirction link to the navigation area. This link allows you
to directly start video redirection (see "Video Redirection - Starting AVR"
on page 308).
Show Video Redirection (Java Web Start) in Navigation
Adds the Video Redirction (JWS) link to the navigation area. This allows
you to directly start video redirection (Java Web Start) (see "Video
Redirection - Starting AVR" on page 308).
Show the Text Console (SOL) in Navigation
Adds the Text Console (SOL) link to the navigation area. This allows you to
directly start text console redirection (see section "Text Console
Redirection (via Serial over LAN) - Start text console redirection" on
page 295).
Show the ’Logout’ in Navigation
This option is only available if the iRMC S2/S3 information page is
displayed in the StyleguideVersion 2.2 color scheme.
Adds the Logout link to the navigation area. This allows you to logout via
the navigation area.
168
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
7.6.2
Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings Save firmware settings
The Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings page allows you to save the current
firmware settings and a number of other settings for the iRMC S2/S3 in a file.
Additionally, you can load the firmware settings onto the iRMC S2/S3 again.
– The firmware settings selected under Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware settings in
ServerView® WinSCU XML format are saved in a file with the name
iRMC_S2_settings.pre or iRMC_ S3_settings.pre, respectively. In the Server
Configuration Manager (WinSCU), you can use the Import... button to load
the firmware settings onto the iRMC S2/S3 again.
– The firmware settings selected under Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware settings in
binary (BMCCLONE.exe) format are saved in a file with the name
iRMC_S2_settings.bin or iRMC_ S3_settings.bin, respectively. You can use
the Import iRMC S2/S3 Firmware settings in ServerView® WinSCU XML format
from file group to load the firmware settings onto the iRMC S2/S3 again.
V CAUTION!
Always save the setting using
Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware settings in ServerView® WinSCU XML format.
Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware settings in binary (BMCCLONE.exe) format
should only be used if the system module of the managed server is being
replaced.
I If you want to save the user settings (Include User Settings), you require
Configure User Accounts permission. In all other cases, Configure
iRMC S2/S3 settings permission is sufficient.
iRMC S2/S3
169
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Figure 87: Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings page
Save iRMC S2/S3 firmware settings ...
The data is exported from the iRMC S2/S3 in logical sections, each
corresponding to a selected option.
The option All other Firmware settings causes the firmware to export all current
ConfigSpace values that have not already been exported together with another
section. New implemented values are automatically exported with newer
firmware versions.
Save
Click Save to save the selected settings.
Save All
Click Save All to save all the settings.
170
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Import iRMC S2/S3 Firmware settings in ServerView® WinSCU XML
format from file
Config File
Configuration file (default: iRMC_S2_settings.bin / iRMC_S3_settings.bin) in
the ServerView® WinSCU XML format from which you want to load the
firmware settings onto the iRMC S2/S3.
Browse
Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the configuration file.
iRMC S2/S3
171
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
7.6.3
Certificate Upload - Load the DSA/RSA certificate
and private DSA/RSA key
The Certificate Upload page allows you to load a signed X.509 DSA/RSA
certificate (SSL) from a Certificate Authority (CA) and/or your private DSA/RSA
key (SSH) onto the iRMC S2/S3.
I The iRMC S2/S3 is supplied with a predefined server certificate (default
certificate). If you want to access the iRMC S2/S3 over secure SSL/SSH
connections, it is recommended that you replace the certificate with one
signed by a Certificate Authority (CA) as soon as possible.
I Input format of the X.509 DSA/RSA certificate and the private DSA/RSA
key:
The X.509 DSA/RSA certificate and the RSA/DSA must both be
available in PEM-encoded format (ASCII/Base64).
172
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Figure 88: Certificate Upload page
iRMC S2/S3
173
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Displaying the currently valid (CA) DSA/RSA certificate
Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click View Certificate to show
the currently valid SSH/SSL-certificate.
Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click View CA Certificate to
show the currently valid CA certificate.
Figure 89: Certificate Upload page - display of the currently valid SSL/SSH certificate
174
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Restoring the default certificate default CA certificate
Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click Default Certificate to
restore the default certificate delivered with the firmware after you have
confirmed that you wish to do so.
Ê In the group Certificate Information and Restore, click Default CA Certificate to
restore the default CA certificate delivered with the firmware after you have
confirmed that you wish to do so.
Figure 90: Certificate Upload page - Restoring the default CA certificate
iRMC S2/S3
175
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Loading a CA certificate from a local file
Use the CA Certificate upload from file group to load a CA certificate from a local
file.
Figure 91: Loading a CA certificate from a local file
Proceed as follows:
Ê Save the CA certificate in a local file on the managed server.
Ê Specify this file under CA Certificate File by clicking the associated Browse...
button and navigating to the file containing the CA certificate.
Ê Click Upload to load the certificate and/or the private key onto the iRMC
S2/S3.
I When you upload the certificate and/or private key, all the existing
HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is
automatically restarted. This process can take up to 30 seconds.
No explicit reset of the iRMC S2/S3 is required.
Ê Click View CA Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded
successfully.
176
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Loading the DSA/RSA certificate and private DSA/RSA key from local files
You do this using the group
SSL Certificate and DSA/RSA private key upload from file.
I The private key and the certificate must be loaded on the iRMC S2/S3 at
the same time.
Figure 92: Loading the DSA/RSA certificate/private DSA/RSA key from local files
Proceed as follows:
Ê Save the X.509 DSA/RSA (SSL) certificate and the private DSA/RSA key in
corresponding local files on the managed server.
Ê Specify the files Private Key File and Certificate File by clicking on the
associated Browse button and navigating to the file which contains the
private key or the certificate.
Ê Click Upload to load the certificate and the private key onto the iRMC S2/S3.
I When you upload the certificate and private key, all the existing
HTTPS connections are closed and the HTTPS server is
automatically restarted. This process can take up to 30 seconds.
No explicit reset of the iRMC S2/S3 is required.
Ê Click View Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded
successfully.
iRMC S2/S3
177
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Entering the DSA/RSA certificate/private DSARSA key directly
You do this using the group SSL DSA/RSA certificate or DSA/RSA private upload via
copy & paste.
I Do not use this method to load a root certificate onto the iRMC S2/S3.
Always load a root certificate using a file (see page 177).
Figure 93: Entering the DSA/RSA certificate/private DSARSA key directly
Proceed as follows:
Ê Copy the X.509 DSA certificate or the private DSA key to the input area.
I You cannot simultaneously enter the certificate and key for the same
upload.
Ê Click Upload to load the certificate or the private key onto the iRMC S2/S3.
Ê Use the Remote Manager to reset the iRMC S2/S3 (see section "Service
processor - IP parameters, identification LED and iRMC S2/S3 reset" on
page 339).
I This is necessary in order to make a certificate or private key loaded
onto the iRMC S2/S3 valid.
Ê Click View Certificate to make sure that the certificate has been loaded
successfully.
178
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
7.6.4
Generate a self-signed Certificate Generate self-signed RSA certificate
You can create a self-signed certificate using the Generate a self-signed Certificate
page.
Figure 94: Generate a self-signed RSA Certificate page
iRMC S2/S3
179
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Certificate Information and Restore
The Certificate Information and Restore group allows you to view the currently
valid DSA/RSA certificate and/or restore the default RSA/DSA certificate.
View Certificate
You can view the currently valid DSA/RSA certificate using this button.
Default Certificate
You can use this button to restore the default certificate delivered with the
firmware after you have confirmed that you wish to do so.
Certificate Creation
Proceed as follows to create a self-signed certificate:
Ê Enter the requisite details under Certificate Creation.
Ê Click Create to create the certificate.
I When generating the new certificate, all the existing HTTPS
connections are closed and the HTTPS server is automatically
restarted. This can take up to 5 minutes depending on the key length.
No explicit reset of the iRMC S2/S3 is required.
180
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
7.6.5
iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update
The iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update page allows you to update the iRMC S2/S3
firmware online. To do this, you must provide the current firmware image either
locally on a remote workstation or on a TFTP server.
Here you can also see information on the iRMC S2/S3 firmware and set the
firmware selector.
Figure 95: iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update page
iRMC S2/S3
181
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Firmware Image Information
Under Firmware Image Information, you can view information on the firmware
version and the SDRR version of the iRMC S2/S3 and set the firmware selector.
Figure 96: iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update - Firmware Information
Firmware Selector
You use the firmware selector to specify which firmware image is to be
activated the next time the iRMC S2/S3 is rebooted.
You have the following options:
– Auto - FW Image with highest FW version
The firmware image with the most recent version is selected
automatically.
– Low FW Image
The low firmware image is selected.
– High FW Image
The high firmware image is selected.
– Select FW Image with oldest FW version
The firmware image with the oldest version is selected.
– Select most recently programmed FW
The most recently updated firmware image is selected.
– Select least recently programmed FW
The least recently updated firmware image is selected.
Apply
Click Apply to set the firmware selector to the option you have set under
Firmware Selector.
182
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Firmware Update from File
The Firmware Update from File group allows you to update the iRMC S2/S3
firmware online. To do this, you must provide the current firmware image in a file
on a remote workstation.
You will find the appropriate firmware image for your PRIMERGY server on
ServerView Suite DVD 1 or you can download it under
http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/com/support/downloads.html.
Figure 97: iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update page - Firmware Update from File
Flash Selector
Specify what iRMC firmware is to be updated.
You have the following options:
– Auto - inactive firmware
The inactive firmware is automatically selected.
– Low Firmware Image
The low firmware image (firmware image 1) is selected.
– High Firmware Image
The high firmware image (firmware image 2) is selected.
iRMC S2/S3
183
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Update file
File in which the firmware image is stored.
I The files listed below each allow you to update one component of
the iRMC S2/S3 firmware in every update run (runtime firmware
and SDR record).
The file rt_sdr_<D-number>_4_08g_00.bin is also available for
some PRIMERGY servers / blade servers. This allows you to
update all the components of the iRMC S2/S3 firmware in a single
operation.
dcod<FW-Version>.bin
Updates the runtime firmware.
<SDR-Version>.SDR
Updates the SDR record.
Browse...
Opens a file browser that allows you to navigate to the update file.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings and to start updating the iRMC S2/S3
firmware.
iRMC S2/S3 TFTP Settings
The iRMC S2/S3 TFTP Settings group allows you to update the iRMC S2/S3
firmware online. To do this, you must provide the current firmware image in a file
on a TFTP server.
You will find the appropriate firmware image for your PRIMERGY server on
ServerView Suite DVD 1 or you can download it under
http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/com/support/downloads.html.
Figure 98: iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update page - iRMC S2/S3 TFTP Settings
TFTP Server
IP address or DNS name of the TFTP server on which the file with the
firmware image is stored.
184
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 - Information, firmware and certificates
Update file
File in which the firmware image is stored.
I The files listed below each allow you to update one component of
the iRMC S2/S3 firmware every time TFTP is started (runtime
firmware and SDR record).
The file rt_sdr_<D-number>_4_08g_00.bin is also available for
some PRIMERGY servers / blade servers. This allows you to
update all the components of the iRMC S2/S3 firmware in a single
operation using a TFTP server.
dcod<FW-Version>.bin
Updates the runtime firmware.
<SDR-Version>.SDR
Updates the SDR record.
Flash Selector
Specify what iRMC firmware is to be updated.
You have the following options:
– Auto - inactive firmware
The inactive firmware is automatically selected.
– Low Firmware Image
The low firmware image (firmware image 1) is selected.
– High Firmware Image
The high firmware image (firmware image 2) is selected.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Click TFTP Test to test the connection to the TFTP server.
Ê Click TFTP Start to download the file containing the firmware image from the
TFTP server and to start updating the iRMC S2/S3 firmware.
iRMC S2/S3
185
Power Management
7.7
Power Management
The Power Management entry contains the links to the power management pages
for your PRIMERGY server:
– "Power On/Off - power the server up/down" on page 187.
– "Power Options - Configuring power management for the server" on
page 191.
– "Power Supply Info - Power supply and IDPROM data for the FRU
components" on page 198.
186
iRMC S2/S3
Power Management
7.7.1
Power On/Off - power the server up/down
The Power On/Off page allows you to power the managed server on and off. You
are informed of the server’s current power status and are also able to configure
the behavior of the server during the next boot operation.
Figure 99: Power On/Off page
Power Status Summary
The Power Status Summary group provides information on the current power
status of the server and on the causes for the most recent Power On/Power Off.
In addition, a Power On counter records the total months, days and minutes
during which the server has been powered.
Figure 100: Power On/Off page - Power Status Summary
iRMC S2/S3
187
Power Management
Boot Options
The Boot Options group allows you to configure the behavior of the system the
next time it is booted. You can set whether the BIOS is to interrupt the boot
process for the system if errors occur during the POST phase.
I The options set here only apply to the next boot operation. After this, the
default mechanism applies again.
Figure 101: Power Management - Boot Options page
Ê Select the desired BIOS behavior from the Error Halt Settings list:
Continue
Continue the boot process if errors occur during the POST phase.
Halt on errors
Interrupt the boot process if errors occur during the POST phase.
Ê From the Boot Device Selector list, select the storage medium you wish to boot
from.
The following options are available:
– No change: The system is booted from the same storage medium as
previously.
– PXE/iSCSI: The system is booted from PXE/iSCSI over the network.
– Harddrive: The system is booted from hard disk.
– CDROM/DVD: The system is booted from CD /DVD.
– Floppy: The system is booted from floppy disk.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
188
iRMC S2/S3
Power Management
Power Control - powering the server up and down/rebooting the server
The Power Control group allows you to power the server up/down or to reboot
the server.
Figure 102: Power On/Off page, Restart (server is powered up)
Figure 103: Power On/Off page, Restart (server is powered down)
Power On
Switches the server on.
Immediate Power Off
Powers the server down, regardless of the status of the operating
system.
Immediate Reset
Completely restarts the server (cold start), regardless of the status of the
operating system.
Pulse NMI
Initiates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). A NMI is a processor interrupt
that cannot be ignored by standard interrupt masking techniques in the
system.
Press Power Button
Depending on the operating system installed and the action configured,
you can trigger various actions by briefly pressing the power-off button.
These actions could be shutting down the computer or switching it to
standby mode or sleep mode.
iRMC S2/S3
189
Power Management
Power Cycle
Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after a
configured period. You can configure this time in the Power Cycle Delay
field of the ASR&R Options group (see page 234).
Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)
Graceful shutdown and power off.
This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and
signed onto the iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
Graceful Reset (Reboot)
Graceful shutdown and reboot.
This option is only available if ServerView agents are installed and
signed onto the iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
Ê Click Apply to start the required action.
190
iRMC S2/S3
Power Management
7.7.2
Power Options Configuring power management for the server
The Power Options page allows you to define the server’s behavior after a power
outage and specify the server’s power on/off times.
Figure 104: Power Options page
iRMC S2/S3
191
Power Management
Power Restore Policy - Specify behavior of the server after a power outage
The Power Restore Policy group allows you to specify the server’s power
management behavior after a power outage.
Figure 105: Power Options page, Power Restore Policy
Always power off
The server always remains powered down after a power outage.
Always power on
The server is always powered up again after a power outage.
Restore to powered state prior to power loss
The power up/down status of the server is restored to the status prior to
the power outage.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
The configured action will be performed after a power outage.
192
iRMC S2/S3
Power Management
Power On/Off Time - Specify power on/off times for the server
The input fields of the Power On/Off Time group allow you to specify the times at
which the server is powered up/down for the individual days of the week or for
specified times during the day.
I Specifications in the Everyday field take priority!
The Trap fields also allow you to configure whether the iRMC S2/S3 sends an
SNMP trap to the management console before a planned power-on / power-off
of the managed server and, if so, how many minutes before the event this
should be done. No traps are sent if you specify the value “0”.
Figure 106: Power Options page, Power On/Off Time
iRMC S2/S3
193
Power Management
0 Watt Technology
I Please note:
– This feature is only supported by the iRMC S3.
– This feature is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.
The "0 Watt Technology" feature allows you to reduce the server’s standby
power consumption to 0 watts. Every time the server is powered off, the server’s
standby power consumption is reduced to 0 Watt (0 Watt mode).
I In the 0 Watt mode, the server can no longer be managed remotely. The
server can only be powered on by pressing the Power button or the PSU
Primary Resume button.
However, by applying the Scheduled option (see page 196) you can
specify a time interval at which the PSU is awoken from 0 Watt mode and
thus both remote management and Wake-on-LAN (WOL) can be used.
Figure 107: Power Options page, 0 Watt Technology
Disabled
Disables 0 Watt mode and remains in / switches to the standard power
on/off mode. The server can be managed remotely at any time.
194
iRMC S2/S3
Power Management
Enabled
Enables 0 Watt mode.
Even if Enabled has been configured, the 0 Watt mode is blocked in the
following cases:
●
Power-cycle request / power-on delay
A power cycle request powers down the server without enabling
0 Watt mode, i.e. 0 Watt mode will not be enabled in the delay between
powering down and powering up during a power cycle:
– Any power-on request occurring within the delay causes the
server to be powered on after the delay is over.
– If no power-on request occurred during the delay, the iRMC S3
enables the 0 Watt mode after the delay time period has passed.
●
Thermal power-on prohibition
If the Temperature Monitoring mode (system thermal power on
prohibition) has been configured in the BIOS/UEFI setup menu, 0 Watt
mode will not be enabled.
●
ASR&R
Any ASR&R action currently reducing the retry counter prevents
0 Watt mode from being enabled. This applies even if the server was
finally powered off after the retry counter reached 0.
●
Scheduled Power On/Off Time (see "Power On/Off Time - Specify
power on/off times for the server" on page 193)
As long as a Power On/Off timer configured in the iRMC S3 Power
Options page is active, 0 Watt mode cannot be enabled.
0 Watt mode also cannot be enabled if the Power On/Off timer gets
deactivated while the server is powered off. In this case, only next
power-off transition will enable 0 Watt mode. No scheduled Power
On/Off timer will then prevent 0 Watt mode from being enabled.
●
Global Error LED
If the global Error LED indicates any problematic system health
conditions, the iRMC S3 will not enable 0 Watt mode. This is because
the server must be able to report system health problems even if
powered off.
iRMC S2/S3
195
Power Management
●
System Identification LED
As long as the System Identification LED is on, the iRMC S3 will not
enable 0 Watt mode.
●
Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)
If an AVR session is currently active, the iRMC S3 will not enable
0 Watt mode. Once all AVR sessions have been finished (i.e, no AVR
is active), the iRMC S3 will enable 0 Watt mode.
●
Remote Storage Server (RSS), Telnet/SSH Sessions
If an RSS session or an SSH/Telnet session is currently active, the
iRMC S3 will not enable 0 Watt mode. This prevents the remote
interface connections to the iRMC S3 from being lost.
●
AC power fail
If an AC fail occurs and the PSU (Power Supply Unit) is in the 0 Watt
mode or in the scheduled mode, the PSU will return to system
standby. Depending on the power restore policy settings (see
page 192), the iRMC S3 determines whether the server is to be
powered on. If the power restore policy is set to Always power off, an
AC fail will never result in 0 Watt mode. 0 Watt mode may be reached
after the next system power on.
Scheduled
Enables 0 Watt mode and also displays the 0 Watt Technology
Administration Window. The 0 Watt Technology Administration Window allows
you to specify a time interval at which the PSU is awoken from 0 Watt
mode and thus both remote management and Wake-on-LAN (WOL) can
be used.
Figure 108: Power Options page, 0 Watt Technology Administration window
Start Time
Defines the beginning (hh:mm) of the time interval.
196
iRMC S2/S3
Power Management
End Time
Defines the end (hh:mm) of the time interval.
Ê
Ê
Click Apply to activate your settings.
Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
197
Power Management
7.7.3
Power Supply Info - Power supply and IDPROM
data for the FRU components
The Power Supply Info page provides you with information on the power supply
specifications and the IDPROM data of the FRUs of the server.
The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components whether the
CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is supported.
Figure 109: Power Supply Info page
198
iRMC S2/S3
Power Consumption
7.8
Power Consumption
The Power Consumption entry contains the links to the pages for monitoring and
controlling the power consumption of the managed server:
– "Power Consumption Configuration - Configure power consumption of the
server" on page 200.
– "Power Options - Configuring power management for the server" on
page 191. (Not shown on all servers with iRMC S2/S3.)
– "Power Consumption History - Show server power consumption" on
page 207 (Not shown on all servers with iRMC S2/S3.)
iRMC S2/S3
199
Power Consumption
7.8.1
Power Consumption Configuration - Configure
power consumption of the server
The Power Consumption Configuration page allows you to specify the mode the
iRMC S2/S3 uses to control the power consumption of your PRIMERGY server.
Figure 110: Power Consumption Configuration page
I Prerequisite:
The following requirements must be met in order to configure power
consumption control:
– The managed PRIMERGY server must support this feature.
– The Enhanced Speed Step or the Processor Power Management option
must be enabled in the Advanced Menu of the BIOS setup.
I If you set the “Power Limit” power control mode in the Power Consumption
Options group or in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration, the
Power Limit Options group is also displayed (see page 202).
200
iRMC S2/S3
Power Consumption
Power Consumption Options
The Power Consumption Options group allows you to select the power control
mode and specify whether the power consumption should be monitored over
time.
Power Control Mode
Mode for controlling the power consumption of the managed server:
– Power Mgmt. Disabled:
The iRMC S2/S3 allows the operating system to control power
consumption.
– Best Performance:
The iRMC S2/S3 controls the server to achieve best performance. In
this event, power consumption can rise.
– Low Noise: (iRMC S3 only)
The iRMC S3 controls the server to achieve the lowest possible noise
emission. This feature is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers
and only available for specific configurations.
– Minimum Power:
The iRMC S2/S3 controls the server to achieve the lowest possible
power consumption. In this event, performance is not always ideal.
– Power Limit:
The Power Limit Options group is displayed (see "Power Limit Options"
on page 204).
– Scheduled:
The iRMC S2/S3 controls power consumption in accordance with a
schedule that you can define using the SCU (see "Scheduled Power
Consumption Configuration" on page 202).
Power Monitoring Units
Unit of electrical power used to display power consumption:
– Watt
– BTU/h (British Thermal Unit/hour, 1 BTU/h corresponds to 0.293
Watt).
iRMC S2/S3
201
Power Consumption
Enable Power Monitoring
If you enable this option, power consumption is monitored over time.
I Power monitoring is enabled by default as of Version 3.32 of the
firmware.
I This setting only takes effect on PRIMERGY servers that support
power monitoring.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration
The Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group allows you to specify in
detail the schedules and modes (operating-system-controlled, best
performance, lowest power consumption) that the iRMC S2/S3 uses to control
power consumption on the managed server.
I The Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group only appears if you
have enabled the power control mode scheduled in the Power Consumption
Options group.
I Configuration for scheduled power control mode assumes that the
Enhanced Speed Step option has been enabled in the BIOS setup. If this is
not the case, a message to this effect is displayed.
If this message appears even though “Enhanced Speed Step” is
enabled, this may be because:
– The CPU (e.g. low-power CPU) of the server does not support
scheduled power control.
– The system is currently in the BIOS POST phase.
202
iRMC S2/S3
Power Consumption
Figure 111: Power Consumption Configuration page (scheduled)
Time 1
Time [hh:ss] at which the iRMC S2/S3 starts power control as defined in
Mode 1 on the relevant day of the week.
Time 2
Time [hh:ss] at which the iRMC S2/S3 starts power control as defined in
Mode 2 on the relevant day of the week.
Mode 1
Power consumption mode used by the iRMC S2/S3 for power control as
of Time 1 on the relevant day of the week.
Mode 2
Power consumption mode used by the iRMC S2/S3 for power control as
of Time 2 on the relevant day of the week.
I Set Time 1 < Time 2, otherwise the power control mode specified under
Mode 2 will only be activated at Time 2 on the relevant day of the following
week.
I Specifications in the Everyday field take priority.
iRMC S2/S3
203
Power Consumption
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
I You can also configure scheduled power control using the Server
Configuration Manager (see chapter "Configuring iRMC S2/S3 using the
Server Configuration Manager" on page 347).
Power Limit Options
The Power Limit Options group is displayed under the following circumstances:
– The power control mode Power Limit is selected and enabled in the Power
Consumption Options group.
– The power control mode Scheduled is enabled in the Power Consumption
Options group and the power control mode Power Limit is enabled at least
once in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group.
The power limit then applies to all periods for which this power control mode
is enabled in the Scheduled Power Consumption Configuration group.
Figure 112: Power Consumption Configuration page (scheduled)
Power Limit
Maximum power consumption (in Watts).
204
iRMC S2/S3
Power Consumption
Warning Threshold
Threshold as a percentage of the maximum power consumption
specified under Power Limit. When the threshold is reached, the action
defined under Action Reaching Power Limit is performed.
Power Limit Grace Period
Period (in minutes) for which the system waits after the threshold has
been reached until the action is performed.
Action Reaching Power Limit
Action to be performed after the threshold has been reached and the
grace period has expired.
Continue
No action is performed.
Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)
Shut down the system "gracefully" and power it down.
I This option is only supported if ServerView agents are
installed and signed onto the iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
Immediate Power Off
The server is immediately powered down irrespective of the status
of the operating system.
Enable Dynamic Power Control
The power limit is controlled dynamically. If this option is enabled, the
iRMC S2/S3 controls the power consumption of the server system by
reducing the CPU’s power consumption as soon as the Warning Threshold
is reached.
iRMC S2/S3
205
Power Consumption
7.8.2
Current Power Consumption Show the current power consumption
I This view is not supported by all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC S2/S3.
The Current Power Consumption page shows the current power consumption of
the system components and of the overall system.
Figure 113: Current Power Consumption page
206
iRMC S2/S3
Power Consumption
7.8.3
Power Consumption History Show server power consumption
The Power Consumption History page charts the power consumption of your
PRIMERGY server.
I This page is not shown on all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 114: Power Consumption History page
iRMC S2/S3
207
Power Consumption
Current Power Consumption
I This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.
Under Current Power Consumption you can see all the measurements for the
server power consumption in the current interval: current, minimum, maximum
and average power consumption.
A graphical display also shows the current power consumption of the server
compared with the maximum possible power consumption.
Figure 115: Power Consumption History - Current Power Consumption
Power History Options
You specify the parameters for displaying the power consumption under Power
History Options.
Figure 116: Power Consumption History - Power History Options
Power History Units
Electrical power units:
– Watt
– BTU/h (British Thermal Unit/hour, 1 BTU/h corresponds to
0.293 Watt).
208
iRMC S2/S3
Power Consumption
Power History Period
Period for which the power consumption is charted.
The following intervals can be selected:
1 hour
Default.
Measurements for the last hour (60 values). Since one
measurement is generated every minute, this shows all the
measurements of the last hour.
12 hours
Measurements for the last 12 hours. One measurement is shown
for each five-minute period (every 5th measurement, 144 values
in all).
1 day
Measurements for the last 24 hours. One measurement is shown
for each 10-minute period (every 10th measurement, 144 values
in all).
1 week
The measurements for the last week. One measurement per hour
is shown (every 60th measurement, 168 values in all).
2 weeks
The measurements for the last month. One measurement is
shown for each period of approx four hours (every 120th
measurement, 168 values in all).
1 month
The measurements for the last 6 months. One measurement is
shown for each period of approx one day (every 240th
measurement, 180 values in all).
1 year
Measurements for the last 12 months. One measurement is
shown for each two-day period (every 2880th measurement, 180
values in all).
iRMC S2/S3
209
Power Consumption
Enable Power Monitoring
Specifies whether power monitoring is to be carried out.
I Power Monitoring) is enabled by default as of Version 3.32 of the
firmware.
I This setting only applies to PRIMERGY servers that support
consumption logging.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Click Delete History to delete the displayed data.
Power History Chart
Power History Chart shows the power consumption of the managed server over
time in the form of a graph (using the settings made under Power History
Options). The difference between the actual power consumption and the power
consumption displayed in the power history chart may amount to about 20%.
Figure 117: Power Consumption History - Power History Chart
210
iRMC S2/S3
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
7.9
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
The “Sensors” entry provides you with pages which allow you to check the
statuses of sensors of the managed server:
– "Fans - Check fans" on page 212.
– "Temperature - Report the temperature of the server components" on
page 215.
– "Voltages - Report voltage sensor information" on page 217.
– "Power Supply - Check power supply" on page 218.
– "Component Status - Check status of the server components" on page 220.
To facilitate checking the status, the sensor status is not only shown in the form
of the current value, but also using a color code and a status icon:
Black (font color)/
The measured value is within the normal operational
value range.
Orange (font color)/
The measured value has exceeded the warning
threshold.
System operation is not yet jeopardized.
Red (font color)/
The measured value has exceeded the critical
threshold.
System operation may be jeopardized and there is a
risk of loss of data integrity.
Table 6: Status of the sensors
iRMC S2/S3
211
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
7.9.1
Fans - Check fans
The Fans page provides information on fans and their status.
Figure 118: Fans page
212
iRMC S2/S3
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
Fan Test - Test fans
The Fan Test group allows you to specify a time at which the fan test is started
automatically or to start the fan test explicitly.
I Instead of the formerly used full speed testing, most new systems now
provide a modified fan test feature which performs the fan test with a
speed near to the currently required speed. In this case, the fan test is no
longer acoustically noticeable.
Fan Check Time
Enter the time at which the fan test is to be started automatically.
Disable Fan Test
Select this option to disable fan testing.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Click Start Fan Test to start the fan test explicitly.
System Fans - Specify server behavior in the event that a fan fails
The System Fans group provides you with information on the status of the fans.
You can use the options or buttons to select individual fans or all the fans and
specify whether the server should be shut down after a specified number of
seconds if this fan fails.
Select all
Selects all fans.
Deselect all
All selections are cancelled.
Ê Select the fans for which you wish to define the behavior in the event of a
fault.
iRMC S2/S3
213
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
Ê Define the behavior in the event of a fault using the list at the bottom of the
work area:
– Choose continue if the server is not to be shut down if the selected fans
fail.
– Choose shutdown-and-power-off if the server is to be shut down and
powered down if the selected fans fail. If you choose this option, you must
also specify the time in seconds between failure of the fan and shutdown
of the server (Shutdown Delay) in the field to the right of the list.
I In the case of redundant fans, shutdown is only initiated if more
than one fan is faulty and shutdown-and-power-off is also set for
these fans.
Ê Click Apply to the selected Fans to activate your settings for the selected fans.
214
iRMC S2/S3
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
7.9.2
Temperature - Report the temperature of the server
components
The Temperature page provides information on the status of the temperature
sensors which measure the temperature at the server components, such as the
CPU and the Memory Module and the ambient temperature.
Figure 119: Temperature page
You can use the options or buttons to select individual temperature sensors or
all the temperature sensors and specify whether the server is to be shut down
if the critical temperature is reached at the selected sensors.
iRMC S2/S3
215
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
Select all
Selects all temperature sensors.
Deselect all
All selections are cancelled.
Ê Select the sensors for which you wish to define the behavior in the event that
the critical temperature is reached.
Ê Define the behavior in the event that the critical temperature is reached
using the list at the bottom of the work area:
– Choose continue if the server is not to be shut down if the critical
temperature is reached at the selected sensors.
– Choose shutdown-and-power-off if the server is to be shut down and
powered down if the critical temperature is reached at the selected
sensors.
Ê Click Apply to the selected Sensors to activate your settings for the selected
temperature sensors.
216
iRMC S2/S3
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
7.9.3
Voltages - Report voltage sensor information
The Voltages page provides information on the status of voltage sensors
assigned to the server components.
Figure 120: Voltages page
iRMC S2/S3
217
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
7.9.4
Power Supply - Check power supply
The Power Supply page provides information on the power supplied from the
power supply units. For some server types, the Power Supply page also allows
you to configure power supply redundancy settings.
Figure 121: Power Supply page
218
iRMC S2/S3
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
Power Supply Redundancy Configuration
I This functionality is not available with all servers.
The Power Supply Redundancy Configuration group allows you to set the
redundancy mode for the managed server. It depends on the servers
capabilities which options are actually available.
PSU Redundancy 1 + 1 Spare PSU
System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 2 PSUs in
total.
PSU Redundancy 2+ 1 Spare PSU
System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 3 PSUs in
total.
PSU Redundancy 3+ 1 Spare PSU
System operation is guaranteed for 1 PSU fail in the case of 4 PSUs in
total.
AC Redundancy 2 + 2 (2 AC sources)
2 of the 4 PSUs are each connected to a separate AC source. This
ensures that the system can continue operation even if a power line or a
single PSU fails.
AC Redundancy 1 + 1 (2 AC sources)
Each PSU (of 2 PSUs in total) is connected to a separate AC source. This
ensures that the system can continue operation even if a power line or a
single PSU fails.
iRMC S2/S3
219
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
7.9.5
Component Status Check status of the server components
The Component Status page provides information on the status of the server
components. The CSS Component column indicates for each of the components
whether the CSS (Customer Self Service) functionality is supported.
Figure 122: Component Status page
220
iRMC S2/S3
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
Entries with Designation "iRMC", "Agent", "BIOS", or "VIOM"
Entries with the Designation "iRMC", "Agent", "BIOS", or "VIOM" indicate that the
iRMC S2/S3, the agent, the BIOS, or VIOM has detected an error. It does not
mean that the iRMC S2/S3, the agent, the BIOS, or VIOM itself is defective.
Entries with Designation "HDD" and "HDD<n>, agentless HDD monitoring
("out-of-band" HDD monitoring)
Entries with the Designation "HDD" or "HDD<n>" (with n = 1, 2, ...) indicate the
statuses of Hard Disk Drives (HDD):
– The entry with Designation "HDD" indicates the overall HDD status of the
server by summarizing the statuses of the individual HDDs.
The overall HDD status of the server is read and reported to the iRMC S2/S3
by the ServerView agents and the ServerView RAID Manager.
– An entry with Designation "HDD<n>" (where n = 1, 2, ...) indicates the status
of an individual HDD.
I Please note:
– This feature is only supported by the iRMC S3.
– This feature only supported if the managed PRIMERGY server
supports the "agentless HDD monitoring" function (also known as
"out-of-band HDD monitoring").
If these requirements are met, the HDD<n> status of each individual
HDD is reported directly to the iRMC S3, i.e. without using the
ServerView agents.
Figure 123: Status display for individual HDDs
iRMC S2/S3
221
Sensors - Check status of the sensors
I The precise entries displayed in the Component Status Sensor Information
table, therefore, depend on the server state and whether the server
supports "agentless HDD monitoring":
– The entry with Designation "HDD" only shows a status in the Signal
Status column if the ServerView agents and the ServerView RAID
Manager are installed and running on the managed server.
Otherwise, "N/A" (not available) is displayed in the Signal Status
column instead.
– The entries with Designation "HDD<n> (with n = 1, 2, ...)" are only
displayed if the managed server supports "agentless HDD
monitoring".
222
iRMC S2/S3
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
7.10
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
The Event Log entry in the navigation area contains the links to the pages for
viewing and configuring the IPMI event log (system event log, SEL) and the
iRMC S2/S3 internal event log:
– "System Event Log Content - Show information on the SEL and the SEL
entries" on page 224.
The internal event log contains entries providing information on audit events
(logon events, AVR connection events, etc.) and additional information (e.g.
IPv6 related information and LDAP user names).
– "Internal Event Log Content - Show information on the internal eventlog and
the associated entries" on page 227.
The IPMI SEL contains entries providing information on events like operating
system boots / shutdowns, fan failures, and iRMC S2/S3 firmware flashes.
– "Event Log Configuration - Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log" on
page 230.
Colored icons are assigned to the various event / error categories to improve
clarity:
Critical
Major
Minor
Informational
Customer Self Service (CSS) event
Table 7: System event log / internal event log content - error categories
iRMC S2/S3
223
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
7.10.1 System Event Log Content Show information on the SEL and the SEL entries
The System Event Log Content page provides information on the IPMI SEL and
displays the SEL entries. The IPMI SEL contains entries providing information
on events like operating system boots / shutdowns, fan failures, and
iRMC S2/S3 firmware flashes.
The CSS Event column indicates for each of the events whether the event was
triggered by a CSS (Customer Self Service) component.
Figure 124: System Event Log Content page
224
iRMC S2/S3
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
System Event Log Information
The System Event Log Information group informs you of the number of entries in
the IPMI SEL. It also indicates the time when the last entries were added or
deleted.
Figure 125: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Information
Clear Event Log
Click Clear Event Log to clear all the entries in the IPMI SEL.
Save Event Log
After you have clicked Save Event Log, the iRMC S2/S3 allows you to
download the file iRMC S2/S3_EventLog.sel, which contains the IPMI SEL
entries.
iRMC S2/S3
225
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
System Event Log Content
The System Event Log Content group displays the SEL entries filtered by severity
class.
I You can modify the filter criteria for the duration of the current session in
the System Event Log Content group. However, the settings you make here
are only valid until the next logout. After that, the default settings apply
again.
Figure 126: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Content
Display Critical, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info, CSS only
If you wish, you can choose one or more severity levels other than the
default values here.
Show Resolutions
If you choose this option, a proposal for solution will be displayed for each
SEL entry of severity level Critical or Major.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings for the duration of the current session.
226
iRMC S2/S3
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
7.10.2 Internal Event Log Content Show information on the internal eventlog and the
associated entries
The Internal Event Log Content page provides information on the internal eventlog
and displays the associated entries. The internal event log comprises audit
events (logon events, AVR connection events, etc.) and additional information
(e.g. IPv6 related information and LDAP user names).
Figure 127: InternalEvent Log Content page
iRMC S2/S3
227
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
Internal Event Log Information
The Internal Event Log Information group informs you of the number of entries in
the internal event log. It also indicates the time when the last entries were added
or deleted.
Figure 128: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Information
Clear Internal Event Log
Click Clear Internal Event Log to clear all the entries in the internal event
log.
Save Internal Event Log
After you have clicked Save Internal Event Log, the iRMC S2/S3 allows you
to download the file iRMC S2_InternalEventLog.sel / the file
iRMC S3_InternalEventLog.sel, which contains the entries of the internal
event log.
228
iRMC S2/S3
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
Internal Event Log Content
The Internal Event Log Content group displays the internal eventlog entries
filtered by severity class.
I You can modify the filter criteria for the duration of the current session in
the Internal Event Log Content group. However, the settings you make
here are only valid until the next logout. After that, the default settings
apply again.
Figure 129: System Event Log Content page, System Event Log Content
Display Critical, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info
If you wish, you can choose one or more severity levels other than the
default values here.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings for the duration of the current session.
iRMC S2/S3
229
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
7.10.3 Event Log Configuration Configure IPMI SEL and internal event log
On the Event Log Configuration page, you can configure the IPMI system event
log (SEL) and the internal eventlog.
You can configure for each of the event logs
– the entries which are displayed by default on the System Event Log Content
page (see page 224) and on the Internal Event Log Content page (see
page 227), respectively.
– whether IPMI SEL and internal eventlog are organized as a ring buffer or a
linear buffer.
Figure 130: Event Log Configuration page
230
iRMC S2/S3
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
IPMI Event Log Configuration
Default LCD panel display filtering
I If a ServerView Local Service Display module is fitted in the
managed PRIMERGY server, you can also select the error
severities for displaying the SEL on the ServerView Local Service
Display. (This selection is independent of the selection you have
made for the SEL entries displayed on the System Event Log Content
page.)
Display Critical, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info, CSS only
Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log
entries should be displayed by default on the on the ServerView
Local Service Display.
Default Web interface display filtering
Display Critical, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info, CSS only
Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log
entries should be displayed by default on the on the
System Event Log Content page (see page 224).
Show Resolutions
If you choose this option, the cause of the entry and a proposal for
resolution will be displayed for each SEL entry of severity level
Critical, Major, or Minor.
Ring Buffer
The event log is organized as a ring buffer.
Linear Buffer
The event log is organized as a linear buffer.
I When the linear event log has been completely filled, it is not
possible to add any further entries.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
231
System Event Log and Internal Event Log
Internal Event Log Configuration
Display Critical, Display Major, Display Minor, Display Info
Here you select one or more severity levels for which event log entries
should be displayed by default on the on the Internal Event Log Content
page (see page 227).
Ring Buffer
The event log is organized as a ring buffer.
Linear Buffer
The event log is organized as a linear buffer.
I When the linear event log has been completely filled, it is not
possible to add any further entries.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Helpdesk Information
Figure 131: Helpdesk Information
Help desk
String used to display the Help Desk
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
232
iRMC S2/S3
Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings
7.11
Server Management Information Configuring the server settings
The Server Management Information page allows you to configure the following
settings on the server:
– ASR&R (automatic server reconfiguration and restart) settings for the server
(see page 234)
– Watchdog settings (see page 235)
– HP System Insight Manager (HP SIM) integration (see page 237)
Figure 132: Server Management Information page
iRMC S2/S3
233
Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings
ASR&R Options - Configure ASR&R settings
The ASR&R Options group allows you to configure the ASR&R (automatic server
reconfiguration and restart) settings for the server.
I The settings made on the ASR&R Options group become active the next
time the managed server is started.
Figure 133: Server Management Information page, ASR&R Options
Retry counter Max (0 - 7)
Maximum number of restart attempts that should be permitted for the
server after a critical error (up to 7).
Retry counter (0 - Max)
Number of restart attempts that a server should attempt after a critical
error (maximum value is the value set under Retry counter Max).
BIOS recovery flash bit
Enables/disables the BIOS recovery flash bit:
– Enabled
The next time the system is booted, the BIOS is automatically
flashed.
– Disabled
The next time the system is booted, the BIOS is not automatically
flashed.
I The Enabled setting is of value if the operating system no longer
boots after the firmware has been updated. A BIOS recovery flash
is then performed automatically the next time the system is booted
from the DOS floppy (or a DOS floppy image).
After a BIOS recovery flash has been performed successfully,
reset the BIOS Recovery Flash bit to disabled.
234
iRMC S2/S3
Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings
Power Cycle Delay (0 - 15)
Time (in seconds) between powering down and powering up during a
power cycle.
Ê Click Apply to save your settings.
The configured settings are saved and the actions which have been
configured are performed in the appropriate circumstances.
Watchdog Settings - Configure software watchdog and boot watchdog
The Watchdog Settings group allows you configure the software watchdog and the
boot watchdog.
I The settings made on the ASR&R Options group become active the next
time the managed server is started.
Figure 134: Server Management Information page, Watchdog Options
The software watchdog
monitors the activities of system using the ServerView agents. The software
watchdog is activated when the ServerView agents and the operating system
have been completely initialized.
The ServerView agents contact the iRMC S2/S3 at defined intervals. If no more
messages are received from a ServerView agent, it is assumed that the system
is no longer functioning correctly.
You can specify an action to be performed if this happens.
The boot watchdog monitors the phase between startup of the system and the
time at which the ServerView agents become available.
If the ServerView agents do not establish a connection to the iRMC S2/S3 of the
server within a specified time, it is assumed that the boot process has not been
successful.
You can specify an action to be performed if this happens.
iRMC S2/S3
235
Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings
Proceed as follows:
Ê Check or uncheck the option(s) under Enabled for the Software Watchdog
and/or Boot Watchdog.
Ê If you have activated either of these options, you can configure the following
settings after Software Watchdog and/or Boot Watchdog:
Continue
No action is performed when the watchdog has expired, i.e. the
server continues to run. An entry is made in the event log.
Reset
The server management software triggers a system reset.
Power Cycle
The server is powered down and immediately powered up again.
Ê As appropriate, enter the time (in minutes) after which this action is to be
performed following after timeout delay.
I The boot watchdog must wait until the system has been started. You
therefore have to specify a sufficient period for after timeout delay (1 100).
Ê Click Apply button.
The configured settings are saved and the actions which have been
configured are performed in the appropriate circumstances.
236
iRMC S2/S3
Server Management Information - Configuring the server settings
HP System Insight Manager (HP SIM) Integration Options Configure HP SIM integration
The HP System Insight Manager (HP SIM) Integration Options group allows you to
configure whether the iRMC S2/S3 device will return some identifying
information in response to an unauthenticated XML query sent from the HP
System Insight Manager.
Figure 135: Page Server Management Information - HP SIM Integration Options
Proceed as follows:
Ê Activate/deactivate the HP SIM Integration Disabled option in order to
deactivate or to activate HP SIM integration.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
237
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
7.12
Network Settings Configure the LAN parameters
The Network Settings entry brings together the links to the pages you use to
configure the LAN parameters of the iRMC S2/S3:
– "Network Interface Settings - Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC
S2/S3" on page 239.
– "Ports and Network Services - Configuring ports and network services" on
page 245.
– "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC S2/S3" on page 249.
238
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
7.12.1 Network Interface Settings Configure Ethernet settings on the iRMC S2/S3
The Network Interface page allows you to view and change the Ethernet settings
for the iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 136: Network Interface page
iRMC S2/S3
239
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
V CAUTION!
Contact the network administrator responsible for the system before you
change the Ethernet settings.
If you make illegal Ethernet settings for the iRMC S2/S3, you will only be
able to access the iRMC S2/S3 using special configuration software, the
serial interface or via the BIOS.
I Only users with the Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings permission are allowed
to edit Ethernet settings (see chapter "User management for the
iRMC S2/S3" on page 65).
Network Interface Settings
MAC Address
The MAC address of the iRMC S2/S3 is displayed here.
LAN Speed
LAN speed. The following options are available:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto Negotiation
1000 MBit/s Full Duplex (depending on the server hardware)
100 MBit/s Full Duplex
100 MBit/s Half Duplex
10 MBit/s Full Duplex
10 MBit/s Half Duplex
If Auto Negotiation is selected, the onboard LAN controller assigned to the
iRMC S2/S3 autonomously determines the correct transfer speed and
duplex method for the network port it is connected to.
LAN Port
I This option is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.
On some PRIMERGY server models, the LAN interface of the installed
system NIC (network interface card) can be set up
– as shared LAN for shared operation with the system
or
– as a service LAN for exclusive use as a management LAN.
240
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
IPv4 Enabled
Enables/disables IPv4 addressing for the iRMC S2/S3. If IPv4
addressing is enabled, the IPv4 configuration group will be displayed (see
below).
You cannot disable IPv4 addressing if the iRMC S2/S3 is currently
accessed via IPv4.
IPv6 Enabled
Enables/disables IPv6 addressing for the iRMC S2/S3. If IPv6
addressing is enabled, the IPv6 configuration group will be displayed (see
below).
You cannot disable IPv6 addressing if the iRMC S2/S3 is currently
accessed via IPv6.
IPv4 configuration
The IPv4 configuration group allows you to configure the IPv4 settings for the
iRMC S2/S3.
IP Address
IPv4 address of the iRMC S2/S3 in the LAN. This address is different
from the IP address of the managed server.
I If you are working with a static address (DHCP enable option not
activated) then you can enter this here. Otherwise (if the
DHCP enable option is activated), the iRMC S2/S3 only uses the
field to display the address.
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask of the iRMC S2/S3 in the LAN.
Gateway
IPv4 address of the default gateway in the LAN.
DHCP Enabled
If you activate this option, the iRMC S2/S3 gets its LAN settings from a
DHCP server on the network.
I Do not activate the DHCP option if no DHCP server is available on
the network.
If you activate the DHCP option and there is no DHCP server
available on the network, the iRMC S2/S3 goes into a search loop
(i.e. it continues searching for a DHCP server until it finds one).
iRMC S2/S3
241
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
The (configured) iRMC S2/S3 can be registered with a DNS
server by an appropriately configured DHCP server (see section
"DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the iRMC S2/S3" on
page 249).
IPv6 configuration
The IPv6 configuration group allows you to manually configure an IPv6 address
for the iRMC S2/S3 in addition to the link-local address, which is always
assigned automatically to the iRMC S2/S3 by using stateless autoconfiguration.
I With ipv6 addressing, DHCP is not supported for the iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 137: Network Interface page - manual IPv6 configuration disabled
Manual IPv6 configuration
This option is disabled by default.
If you enable the Manual IPv6 configuration option, the IPv6 configuration
group displays additional parameters that allow you to manually
configure a routable IPv6 address for the iRMC S2/S3:
Figure 138: Network Interface page - manual IPv6 configuration
Interface Identifier Source
Specifies from which source the interface identifier part of the IPv6
address is taken.
242
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
Part of the specified static address
Part of the static address specified under IPv6 Static Address.
EUI-64 (based on MAC address)
EUI-64 standard conform representation of the MAC address of
the iRMC S2/S3.
IPv6 Static Address
Static IPv6 address for the iRMC S2/S3.
Prefix Length
Length of the IPv6 prefix.
IPv6 Static Gateway
Static IPv6 address of the default IPv6 gateway in the LAN.
IPv6 Gateway Source
IPv6 gateway that is used by the iRMC S2/S3.
Static IPv6 Gateway
Gateway specified under IPv6 Static Gateway.
Automatic (Router specific)
The gateway is determined automatically by the Router.
VLAN Configuration
VLAN Enabled
This option allows you to activate VLAN support for the iRMC S2/S3.
VLAN Id
VLAN ID of the virtual network (VLAN) the iRMC S2/S3 belongs to.
Permitted value range: 1 Î VLAN Id Î 4094.
VLAN Priority
VLAN priority (user priority) of the iRMC S2/S3 in the VLAN specified by
VLAN Id.
Permitted value range: 0 Î VLAN Priority Î 7 (default: 0).
iRMC S2/S3
243
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
Advanced TCP configuration
Max TCP Segment Lifetime
Maximum lifetime (in seconds) of TCP/IP packet (Default: 32 seconds).
TCP Connection Timeout
Timeout value (in seconds) of the TCP connection (Default: 32 seconds).
Max. Transmission Unit (MTU)
Maximum packet size (in bytes) of the TCP/IP data packages that will be
accepted by the TCP/IP connection. (Default: 3000 Bytes).
Ê Click Apply to activate the configured Ethernet settings.
244
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
7.12.2 Ports and Network Services Configuring ports and network services
The Ports and Network Services page allows you to view and modify the
configuration settings for ports and network services.
Figure 139: Ports and Network Services page
I Configuration is not supported for ports where the input fields are
deactivated in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
iRMC S2/S3
245
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
Ports for web-based access
Session Timeout
Period of inactivity (in seconds) after which the session is automatically
closed. The login page of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface then appears,
and you can log in again as required (see page 136).
I Your session will not automatically be closed if it is inactive when
the time specified in Session Timeout has elapsed if you enter a
value for the refresh interval which is less than the Session Timeout
in the Refresh every ... seconds field (see page 247).
HTTP Port
HTTP port of the iRMC S2/S3
Default port number: 80
Configurable: yes
Enabled by default: yes
Communication direction: inbound and outbound
HTTPS Port
HTTPS (HTTP Secure) port of the iRMC S2/S3
Default port number: 443
Configurable: yes
Enabled by default: yes
Communication direction: inbound and outbound
Force HTTPS
If you enable the Force HTTPS option, users can only establish a secure
connection to the iRMC S2/S3 on the HTTPS port specified in the entry
field.
If you disable the Force HTTPS option, users can establish a non-secure
connection to the iRMC S2/S3 on the HTTP port specified in the entry
field.
I If the SSL certificate has expired, a message to this effect is
issued in the browser.
Enable Auto Refresh
If you activate this option, the contents of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
are automatically refreshed periodically. Specify the refresh interval in
the Refresh every ... seconds field.
246
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
Refresh every ... seconds
Length (in seconds) of the interval for automatically refreshing the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface.
I If you enter a value for the refresh interval which is less than the
Session Timeout (see page 246), your session will not automatically
be closed when the time specified in Session Timeout has elapsed
in the event of inactivity.
Ports for text-based access
Telnet Port
Telnet port of the iRMC S2/S3
Default port number: 3172
Configurable: yes
Enabled by default: no
Communication direction: inbound and outbound
Session Drop Time
Period of inactivity (in seconds) after which a Telnet connection is
automatically cleared.
SSH Port
SSH (Secure Shell) port of the iRMC S2/S3
Default port number: 22
Configurable: yes
Enabled by default: yes
Communication direction: inbound and outbound
Telnet enabled
If you enable the Telnet Enabled option, users can establish a connection
to the iRMC S2/S3 on the Telnet port specified in the entry field.
iRMC S2/S3
247
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
VNC ports
Standard Port
VNC port of the iRMC S2/S3 for secure and non-secure Advanced Video
Redirection (AVR)
Port number: 80
Hard-configured
Enabled by default: yes
Communication direction: inbound
Secure Port (SSL)
VNC port of the iRMC S2/S3 for the SSL-secured transfer of mouse and
keyboard input for AVR.
Port number: 443
Hard-configured.
Enabled by default: yes
Communication direction: inbound
Remote Storage Ports
Standard Port
Default remote storage port of the iRMC S2/S3
Default port number: 5901
Configurable: yes
Enabled by default: yes
Communication direction: outbound to the remote workstation
I As of iRMC S2/S3 firmware version 5.00, the Remote Storage port is
used only for the Remote Storage server and client-internal
communications. For integrated Remote Storage, the http port is used.
Ê Click Apply to store the configured settings.
248
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
7.12.3 DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the
iRMC S2/S3
The DNS Configuration page allows you to activate the Domain Name Service
(DNS) for the iRMC S2/S3 and to configure a host name for the iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 140: DNS Configuration page
iRMC S2/S3
249
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
DNS Settings
The DNS Settings group allows you to activate the Domain Name Service (DNS)
for the iRMC S2/S3. This makes it possible to use symbolic DNS names instead
of IP addresses for configuring the iRMC S2/S3.
Figure 141: DNS Configuration page - DNS Settings
DNS enabled
Enables/disables DNS for the iRMC S2/S3.
Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP
If you activate this option, the IP addresses of the DNS servers are
obtained automatically from the DHCP server.
In this event, up to five DNS servers are supported.
If you do not enable this setting, you can enter up to five DNS server
addresses manually under DNS-Server 1 - DNS-Server 5.
DNS Domain
If the option Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP is disabled, specify the
name of the default domain for requests to the DNS server(s).
DNS Server 1 .. 5
If the Obtain DNS configuration from DHCP option is disabled, you can
enter the names of up to five DNS servers here.
DNS Retries
Number of DNS retries.
DNS Timeout
Timeout (in seconds) for a DNS response.
Ê Click Apply to store the configured settings.
250
iRMC S2/S3
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
DNS Name
The DNS Name group allows you to configure a host name for the iRMC S2/S3
and thus use “dynamic DNS”. Dynamic DNS allows DHCP servers to
autonomously pass on the IP address and system name of a network
component to DNS servers to facilitate identification.
Figure 142: DNS Configuration page - DNS Name
Register DHCP Address in DNS via DHCP Server
This option is disabled if IPv6 addressing is used.
Enables/disables the transfer of the DHCP name to the DHCP server for
the iRMC S2/S3 and the DNS registration via DHCP server.
Register full domain name (FQDN) via DHCP server in DNS
This option is disabled if IPv6 addressing is used.
Enables/disables the transfer of the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain
Name) to the DHCP server for the iRMC S2/S3 and the DNS registration
via DHCP server.
DNS Update Enabled
Enables/disables update of DNS records via Dynamic DNS.
Use iRMC S2/S3 name instead of server hostname
The iRMC S2/S3 name specified in the iRMC S2/S3 Name entry field is
used for the iRMC S2/S3 instead of the server name.
Add Serial Number
The last 3 bytes of the MAC address of the iRMC S2/S3 are appended
to the DHCP name of the iRMC S2/S3.
Add Extension
The extension specified in the Extension entry field is appended to the
DHCP name of the iRMC S2/S3.
iRMC S2/S3
251
Network Settings - Configure the LAN parameters
iRMC S2/S3 Name
iRMC S2/S3 name passed to DHCP for the iRMC S2/S3 in place of the
server name. Depending on the related options, the iRMC S2/S3 name
is used as part of the DNS name.
Extension
Name extension for the iRMC S2/S3.
DNS Name
Shows the configured DNS name for the iRMC S2/S3.
Ê Click Apply to store the configured settings.
252
iRMC S2/S3
Alerting - Configure alerting
7.13
Alerting - Configure alerting
The Alerting entry contains the links to the pages you use to configure alerting
for the iRMC S2/S3:
– "SNMP Trap Alerting - Configure SNMP trap alerting" on page 254.
– "Serial / Modem Alerting - Configure alerting via modem" on page 255.
– "Email Alerting - Configure email alerting" on page 257.
iRMC S2/S3
253
Alerting - Configure alerting
7.13.1 SNMP Trap Alerting Configure SNMP trap alerting
The SNMP Trap Alerting page allows you to view and configure the settings for
SNMP trap alerting.
I Forwarding of SNMP traps to up to seven SNMP servers is supported.
Figure 143: SNMP Trap Alerting page
SNMP Community
Name of the SNMP community.
Ê Click Apply to accept the community name.
SNMP Server1 .. SNMP Server7 (trap destinations)
DNS names or IP addresses of the servers that belong to this community
and are to be configured as Trap Destinations.
Ê Click Apply to activate the SNMP server as a trap destination.
Ê Click Test to test the connection to the SNMP server.
Ê Click Apply All to activate all the settings if appropriate.
254
iRMC S2/S3
Alerting - Configure alerting
7.13.2 Serial / Modem Alerting Configure alerting via modem
I The Serial / Modem Alerting page is only available with the iRMC S2.
The Serial / Modem Alerting page allows you to configure how alerts are
forwarded via a modem.
Figure 144: Serial / Modem Alerting page
Modem Alerting Enable
Enables or disables serial / modem alerting.
Modem Init String
Please refer to your modem documentation for details on this entry.
Modem Reset/Hangup String
Please refer to your modem documentation for details on this entry.
Modem Dial Prefix
This entry will depend on the type of connection you have.
iRMC S2/S3
255
Alerting - Configure alerting
Provider Phone Number
Enter the name of the SMS server.
Handy/Pager Phone Number
Enter the name of the mobile phone.
Handy/Pager Type
You can choose between:
–
–
–
–
–
Signal Pager
Numeric Pager
Alpha pager
SMS
DoCoMo
SMS Message Length Limit
You can choose between 80 or 140 as the maximum length.
SMS Protocol Type
Enable the option corresponding to the mobile phone network used.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Click Test to send a test alert.
256
iRMC S2/S3
Alerting - Configure alerting
7.13.3 Email Alerting - Configure email alerting
The Email Alerting page allows you to configure the settings for
email alerting.
I Configuration of two mail servers is supported.
Email alerting can be specified individually for each user (see section
"User “<name>” Configuration - User configuration (details)" on
page 266).
Figure 145: Email Alerting page
iRMC S2/S3
257
Alerting - Configure alerting
Global Email Paging Configuration - Configure global email settings
The Global Email Paging Configuration group allows you to configure the global
email settings.
Figure 146: Email Alerting page, Global Email Configuration
Email Alerting Enable
Activate this option.
SMTP Retries (0 - 7)
Number of SMTP retries.
SMTP Retry Delay (0 - 255)
Time (in seconds) between SMTP retries.
SMTP Response Timeout
Timeout (in seconds) for an SMTP response.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
258
iRMC S2/S3
Alerting - Configure alerting
Primary SMTP Server Configuration - Configure primary mail server
The Primary SMTP Server Configuration group allows you to configure the
primary server (SMTP server).
Figure 147: Email Alerting page, Primary SMTP Server Configuration
SMTP Server
IP address of the primary mail server
I You can activate the Domain Name Service (DNS) for the iRMC
S2/S3 (see "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the
iRMC S2/S3" on page 249). You can then use a symbolic name
instead of the IP address.
SMTP Port
SMTP port of the mail server
Auth Type
Authentication type for connecting the iRMC S2/S3 to the mail server:
– None
No authentication for the connection.
– SMTP AUTH (RFC 2554)
Authentication according to RFC 2554: SMTP Service Extension for
Authentication.
In this case, the following information is required:
Auth User Name
User name for authentication on the mail server
Auth Password
Password for authentication on the mail server
Confirm Password
Confirm the password entered.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
259
Alerting - Configure alerting
Secondary SMTP Server Configuration - Configure secondary mail server
The Secondary SMTP Server Configuration group allows you to configure the
secondary server (SMTP server).
Figure 148: Email Alerting page - Secondary SMTP Server Configuration
SMTP Server
IP address of the secondary mail server
I
You can activate the Domain Name Service (DNS) for the iRMC
S2/S3 (see "DNS Configuration - Configuring DNS for the
iRMC S2/S3" on page 249). You can then use a symbolic name
instead of the IP address.
SMTP Port
SMTP port of the mail server
Auth Type
Authentication type for connecting the iRMC S2/S3 to the mail server:
– None
No authentication for the connection.
– SMTP AUTH (RFC 2554)
Authentication according to RFC 2554: SMTP Service Extension for
Authentication.
In this case, the following information is required:
Auth User Name
User name for authentication on the mail server
Auth Password
Password for authentication on the mail server
Confirm Password
Confirm the password entered.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
260
iRMC S2/S3
Alerting - Configure alerting
Mail Format dependent Configuration Configure mail-format-dependent settings
The Mail Format dependent Configuration group allows you to configure the mailformat-dependent settings. You specify the mail format for each user using the
New User Configuration - User <Name> Configuration - Email Format Configuration
page (see page 270).
The following email formats are supported:
–
–
–
–
Standard
Fixed Subject
ITS-Format
Fujitsu REMCS Format
Figure 149: Email Alerting page, Mail Format dependent Configuration
Some entry fields are disabled depending on the mail format.
From
Sender identification iRMC S2/S3.
Active for all mail formats.
I If the string entered here contains an “@”, the string is interpreted
as a valid email address. Otherwise, “admin@<ip-address>” is
used as the valid email address.
Subject
Fixed subject for the alert mails.
Only active for the Fixed Subject mail format (see page 270).
Message
Type of message (email).
Only active for the Fixed Subject mail format (see page 270).
iRMC S2/S3
261
Alerting - Configure alerting
Admin Name
Name of the administrator responsible (optional).
Only active for the ITS mail format (see page 270).
Admin Phone
Phone number of the administrator responsible (optional).
Only active for the ITS mail format (see page 270).
REMCS Id
This ID is an additional server ID, similar to the serial number.
Only active for the mail format Fujitsu REMCS-Format.
Server URL
A URL under which the server is accessible under certain conditions. You
have to enter the URL manually.
Only active for the Standard mail format.
Ê
262
Click Apply to store your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
7.14
User Management
The User Management entry contains the links to the pages for local user
management as well as for the configuration of the directory service for global
user management (LDAP configuration):
– "iRMC S2/S3 User - local user management on the iRMC S2/S3" on
page 263.
– "Directory Service Configuration (LDAP) - Configuring the directory service
at the iRMC S2/S3" on page 273.
– "Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration - Configuring the
CAS Service" on page 286.
7.14.1 iRMC S2/S3 User - local user management on the
iRMC S2/S3
The iRMC S2/S3 User page contains a table showing all the configured users:
Each line contains the data for one configured user. The user names are
implemented in the form of links. Clicking on a user name opens the
User “<name>” Configuration window (see page 266), in which you can view or
modify the settings for this user.
I User ID 1 (“null user”) is reserved for the IPMI standard and is therefore
unavailable for user management on the iRMC S2/S3.
iRMC S2/S3
263
User Management
Figure 150: User Management page
Delete
The table of configured users includes a Delete button after each user
entry. Click this button to delete the associated user after confirming this
choice.
New User
When you click this button, the
New User Configuration page opens (see page 265). You can configure a
new user here.
264
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
7.14.1.1 New User Configuration - Configuring a new user
The New User Configuration page allows you to configure the basic settings for a
new user.
You will find explanations of the fields and selection lists on the
New User Configuration page as of page 267 under the description of the User
“<name>” Configuration page.
In figure 151 you can see the configuration of a user with the name “User3”.
Figure 151: User Management - New User Configuration page
iRMC S2/S3
265
User Management
7.14.1.2 User “<name>” Configuration - User configuration (details)
The User “<name>” Configuration page allows you to view, modify and extend
the settings for a user.
In figure 152 you can see the configuration of the user created in figure 151.
I The user ID is shown in brackets after the user name.
Figure 152: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page
266
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
User Information - Configuring user access data
The User Information group allows you to configure the access data for the user.
Figure 153: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, User Information
User Enabled
Disable this option to lock the user.
Name
Enter the name of the user.
Password
Enter the user password.
Confirm Password
Confirm the password by entering it again here.
User Description
Enter a general description of the configured user here.
User Shell
Select the desired user shell here.
The following options are available:
– SMASH CLP
See section "Start a Command Line shell... - Start a SMASH CLP
shell" on page 340.
– Remote Manager
See chapter "iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager)" on
page 321.
– IPMI Terminal Mode
– None
Ê
Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
267
User Management
Privileges / Permissions - Assigning user privileges
The Privileges / Permissions group allows you to configure the channel-specific
user privileges.
Figure 154: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, Privilege / Permissions
LAN Channel Privilege
Assign a privilege group for a LAN channel to the user here:
–
–
–
–
User
Operator
Administrator
OEM
Refer to section "User permissions" on page 68 for information on the
permissions associated with the privilege groups.
Serial Channel Privilege
Assign a privilege group for a serial channel to the user here: The same
privilege groups are available as for LAN Channel Privilege.
In addition to the channel-specific permissions, you can also individually assign
users the following channel-independent permissions:
Configure User Accounts
Permission to configure local user access data.
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Permission to configure the iRMC S2/S3 settings.
Video Redirection enabled
Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View Only” and
“Full Control” mode.
Remote Storage enabled
Permission to use the Remote Storage functionality.
268
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Ê
Click Apply to activate your settings.
User SSHv2 public key upload from file
The User SSHv2 public Key uploag from file group allows you to load an user
SSHv2 public key from a local file.
Figure 155: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, User SSHv2 public key
upload from file
For further details on SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S2/S3 users
see section "SSHv2 public key authentication for iRMC S2/S3 users" on
page 72.
iRMC S2/S3
269
User Management
Email Configuration - Configure user-specific email settings
The Email Configuration group allows you to configure the user-specific settings
governing the email format.
Figure 156: User Management - User “<name>” Configuration page, Email Configuration
Email Enabled
Specify whether the user is to be informed about system statuses by
email.
Mail Format
Depending on the selected email format, you can make a number of
settings in the Email Alerting - Mail Format dependent Configuration group
(see page 261).
The following email formats are available:
–
–
–
–
270
Standard
Fixed Subject
ITS-Format
Fujitsu REMCS Format
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Preferred Mail Server
Select the preferred mail server.
You can choose one of the following options:
– Automatic
If the email cannot be sent successfully immediately, for instance
because the preferred mail server is not available, the email is sent to
the second mail server.
– Primary
Only the mail server which has been configured as the primary SMTP
server (see page 259) is used as the preferred mail server.
– Secondary
Only the mail server which has been configured as the secondary
SMTP server (see page 260) is used as the preferred mail server.
I Errors sending email are recorded in the event log.
Email Address
Email address of recipient.
iRMC S2/S3
271
User Management
Paging Severity Configuration
Here you can configure system events about which an iRMC S2/S3 user
is to be informed by email.
I Every entry in the event log for the iRMC S2/S3 is assigned to a
particular paging group.
The following settings are available for each event group:
None
The notification function is deactivated for this paging group.
Critical
The iRMC S2/S3 notifies users by email if an entry in the system
event log is reported as CRITICAL.
Warning
The iRMC S2/S3 notifies users by email if an entry in the system
event log is reported as Minor or Major or Critical.
All
The iRMC S2/S3 notifies users of every event in this group which
causes an entry to be made in the system event log.
Ê
272
Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
7.14.2 Directory Service Configuration (LDAP) Configuring the directory service at the
iRMC S2/S3
In order to perform global user management via a directory service (see the
"User Management in ServerView" manual), you must configure the
iRMC S2/S3 appropriately in the Directory Service Configuration page.
I Currently, support for iRMC S2/S3 LDAP access is provided for the
following directory services: Microsoft Active Directory, Novell eDirectory
and Open LDAP.
I The following characters are reserved as metacharacters for search
strings in LDAP: *, \ , &, |, !, =, <, >, ~, :
You must therefore not use these characters as components of Relative
Distinguished Names (RDN).
Figure 157: Directory Service Configuration page (LDAP configuration)
iRMC S2/S3
273
User Management
LDAP Enabled
This option specifies whether the iRMC S2/S3 can access a directory
service via LDAP. Directory service access via LDAP is only possible if
LDAP Enable has been activated.
I If LDAP Enable is checked then the login information (see
page 136) is always transferred with SSL encryption between the
web browser and the iRMC S2/S3.
LDAP SSL Enabled
If you check this option then data transfer between iRMC S2/S3 and the
directory server is SSL encrypted.
I LDAP SSL Enable has no influence on whether or not the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface pages are SSL-protected on opening.
I You should only activate LDAP SSL Enable if a domain controller
certificate is installed.
Disable Local Login
If you activate this option then all the local iRMC S2/S3 user
identifications are locked and only the user identifications managed by
the directory service are valid.
V CAUTION!
If the option Disable Local Login is activated and the connection to
the directory service fails then it is no longer possible to log in at
the iRMC S2/S3.
Always use SSL Login
I This option is only relevant if LDAP is deactivated.
If you activate this option then the HTTP SSL-secured login page is
always used even if LDAP is deactivated. Only if you do not activate
Always use SSL Login and LDAP is deactivated is a mask secured via
Digest Authentication Login used.
274
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Directory Server Type
Type of directory server used:
The following directory services are supported:
– Active Directory: Microsoft Active Directory
– Novell: Novell eDirectory
– OpenLDAP: OpenLDAP
– Open DS
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Different input fields are provided, depending on the directory service you
select:
– For Active Directory, refer to section "Configuring iRMC S2/S3 for
Microsoft Active Directory" on page 276.
– For eDirectory, Open LDAP and OpenDS, refer to section "Configuring
iRMC S2/S3 for Novell eDirectory / OpenLDAP / OpenDS" on page 280.
iRMC S2/S3
275
User Management
7.14.2.1 Configuring iRMC S2/S3 for Microsoft Active Directory
After you have confirmed the Active Directory you have chosen by clicking Apply,
the following variant of the Directory Service Configuration page is shown:
Figure 158: Directory Service Configuration: Specifications for Microsoft Active Directory
I The entries shown as examples in figure 158 refer to the examples and
figures shown in the "User Management in ServerView" manual.
276
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Proceed as follows:
Ê Complete your specifications in the Global Directory Service Configuration
group:
Figure 159: Global Directory Service Configuration: Specifications for Microsoft Active
Directory
Primary LDAP Server
LDAP directory server that is to be used.
LDAP Server
IP address or DSN name of the primary LDAP server.
LDAP Port
LDAP port of the primary LDAP server.
LDAP SSL Port
Secure LDAP port of the primary LDAP server
Backup LDAP Server
LDAP directory server which is maintained as the backup server and
used as the directory server if LDAP Server 1 fails.
LDAP Server
IP address or DSN name of the Backup LDAP server.
LDAP Port
LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server.
LDAP SSL Port
Secure LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server
iRMC S2/S3
277
User Management
Domain Name
Complete DNS path name of the directory server.
Base DN
Base DN is automatically derived from Domain Name.
Groups directory as sub-tree from base DN
Pathname of the organizational unit (OU) which as a subtree of
Base DN (Group DN Context) contains the OUs SVS or iRMCgroups.
Department name
The department name is used in the directory service in order to
determine the user permissions and alert roles. A user may have
different permissions for the department X server than for the
department Y server.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Configure the LDAP access data in the Directory Service Access Configuration
group:
I The settings that you make here are required for alerting in
connection with global user identifications. If alerting is not enabled,
the settings in the Directory Service Access Configuration group are not
significant.
Figure 160: Microsoft Active Directory: Directory Service Access Configuration
LDAP Auth User Name
User name the iRMC S2/S3 uses to log onto the LDAP server.
LDAP Auth Password
Password the user specified under User Name uses to authenticate
themselves on the LDAP server.
Confirm Password
Repeat the password you entered under LDAP Auth Password.
278
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Test LDAP Access
Checks the access data to the LDAP directory server and shows the
LDAP status as the result (see figure 161).
I This test only checks the basic access data (“Is the LDAP
server present?”, “Is the user configured?”), but does not fully
authenticate the user.
Figure 161: Microsoft Active Directory: Status of the connection to the LDAP
server
Ê Click Reset LDAP Status to reset the status display.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Configure the settings for global email alerting in the Directory Service Email
Alert Configuration group.
Figure 162: Directory Service Email Alert Configuration
LDAP Email Alert Enable
Enables global email alerting.
LDAP Alert Table Refresh [Hours]
Defines the interval at which the email table is regularly updated (see
the "User Management in ServerView" manual).
I It is strongly recommended that you specify a value >0. A
value of “0” means that the table is not updated regularly.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
279
User Management
7.14.2.2 Configuring iRMC S2/S3 for Novell eDirectory / OpenLDAP /
OpenDS
After you have confirmed you choice of Novell or OpenLDAP by clicking Apply,
the following variant of the Directory Service Configuration page is shown.
I The Directory Service Configuration page has an identical structure for
Novell eDirectory, OpenLDAP and OpenDS.
Figure 163: Global Directory Service Configuration: Specifications for Novell eDirectory /
Open LDAP
I The entries shown as examples in figure 163 refer to the examples and
figures shown in the "User Management in ServerView" manual.
280
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Proceed as follows:
Ê Complete your specifications in the Global Directory Service Configuration
group:
Figure 164: Global Directory Service Configuration: Specifications for Novell eDirectory
/ Open LDAP / OpenDS
Primary LDAP Server
LDAP directory server that is to be used.
LDAP Server
IP address or DSN name of the primary LDAP server.
LDAP Port
LDAP port of the primary LDAP server.
LDAP SSL Port
Secure LDAP port of the primary LDAP server
iRMC S2/S3
281
User Management
Backup LDAP Server
LDAP directory server which is maintained as the backup server and
used as the directory server if LDAP Server 1 fails.
LDAP Server
IP address or DSN name of the Backup LDAP server.
LDAP Port
LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server.
LDAP SSL Port
Secure LDAP port of the Backup LDAP server
Department Name
Department name. The directory service needs the department
name in order to determine the user permissions. A user may have
different permissions for the department X server than for the
department Y server.
Base DN
The Base DN is the fully distinguished name of the eDirectory or Open
LDAP server and represents the tree or subtree that contains the OU
(Organizational Unit) SVS or iRMCgroups. This DN forms the starting
point for LDAP searches.
Groups directory as sub-tree from base DN
Pathname of the OU which as a subtree of Base DN
(Group DN Context) contains the OUs SVS or iRMCgroups.
User Search Context
Pathname of the OU which as a subtree of Base DN (User Search
Context) contains the OU unit Users.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
282
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Ê Configure the LDAP access data in the Directory Service Access Configuration
group:
Figure 165: Novell eDirectory / Open LDAP: Directory Service Access Configuration
LDAP Auth Password
Password the Principal User uses to authenticate themselves on the
LDAP server.
Confirm Password
Repeat the password you entered under LDAP Auth Password.
Principal User DN
Fully distinguished name, i.e. the full description of the object path
and attributes of the generic iRMC S2/S3 user ID (principal user),
under which the iRMC S2/S3 queries the permissions of the
iRMC S2/S3 users from the LDAP server.
Append Base DN to Principal User DN
If you activate this option, you do not need to specify the Base DN
under Principal User DN. In this event, the Base DN is used that you
specified under Base DN in the Global Directory Service Configuration
group.
Bind DN
Bind DN shows the principal user DN used for LDAP authentication.
iRMC S2/S3
283
User Management
Enhanced User Login
Enhanced flexibility when users log in.
V CAUTION!
Only activate this option if you are familiar with the LDAP
syntax. If you inadvertently specify and activate an invalid
search filter, users can only log in to the iRMC S2/S3 under a
global login after the Enhanced User Login option has been
deactivated.
Figure 166: Enhanced User Login
If you select Enhanced User Login and activate it with Apply, an
additional field User Login Search Filter appears containing the
standard login search filter "(&(objectclass=person)(cn=%s))".
Figure 167: LDAP search filter for “Enhanced User Login”
At login, the placeholder “%s” is replaced by the associated global
login. You can modify the standard filter by specifying another
attribute in place of “cn=”. All global logins are then permitted to log
into the iRMC S2/S3 which meet the criteria of this search filter.
284
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Test LDAP Access
Checks the access data to the LDAP directory server and shows the
LDAP status as the result (see figure 161).
I This test only checks the basic access data (“Is the LDAP
server present?”, “Is the user configured?”), but does not fully
authenticate the user.
Figure 168: eDirectory / OpenLDAP: Status of the connection to the LDAP server
Ê Click Reset LDAP Status to reset the status display.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Ê Configure the settings for global email alerting in the Directory Service Email
Alert Configuration group.
Figure 169: Directory Service Email Alert Configuration
LDAP Email Alert Enable
Enables global email alerting.
LDAP Alert Table Refresh [Hours]
Defines the interval at which the email table is regularly updated (see
the "User Management in ServerView" manual). A value of “0” means
that the table is not updated regularly.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
285
User Management
7.14.3 Centralized Authentication Service (CAS)
Configuration - Configuring the CAS Service
I This view is not supported by all PRIMERGY servers with iRMC S2/S3.
SSO is only supported for accessing the iRMC S2/S3 via the web
interface. SSO is not supported for accessing the iRMC S2/S3 via the
Remote Manager (Telnet/SSH).
The Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration page allows you to
configure the iRMC S2/S3 web interface for CAS-based single sign-on (SSO)
authentication.
The first time a user logs in to an application within the SSO domain of the CAS
service, they are prompted for their credentials by the CAS-specific login
screen. Once they have been successfully authenticated by the CAS service,
the user is granted access to the iRMC S2/S3 web interface as well as to any
other service within the SSO domain without being prompted for login
credentials again.
Figure 170: Centralized Authentication Service (CAS) Configuration
286
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
CAS Generic Configuration
The CAS Generic Configuration group allows you to configure CAS access data.
Figure 171: CAS Generic Configuration
CAS Enabled
Enables SSO using the CAS service that you specify in the
CAS Generic Configuration group.
Enable SSL/HTTPS
All communication between the CAS service and the iRMC S2/S3 is SSL
encrypted.
Verify SSL Certifikate
The SSL Certificate of the CAS service is checked against the CA
Certificate.
iRMC S2/S3
287
User Management
Always Display Login Page
I If Always Display Login Page is disabled and the CAS service
cannot be reached, type /login after the IP address of the
iRMC S2/S3 in your browser’s navigation bar.
Always displays the iRMC S2/S3 login page:
Figure 172: Login page
Figure 173: Login page - explicit authentication required
This allows users to temporarily login at the iRMC S2/S3 with privileges
and permissions that differ from the authorization profile defined under
CAS User Privilege and Permissions (see page 290).
A user may, for instance, currently be logged in to the CAS service under
a user ID with the User privilege and now wants to perform an action
requiring the Administrator privilege. The user can temporarily login at the
iRMC S2/S3 under a user ID with the required privileges. However, the
user cannot switch between both user IDs.
The buttons iRMC Login and CAS Login work as follows:
iRMC S2/S3 Login
Logs the user in to the iRMC S2/S3 web interface with the values
specified for User name and Password. The CAS service is
bypassed.
288
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
CAS Login
Logs the user in to the iRMC S2/S3 web interface via SSO:
– If the user has not been authenticated by the CAS service yet:
The user is redirected to the CAS service for authentication
with the specified values for User name and Password.
– If the user has already been authenticated by the CAS service:
The user is logged in at the iRMC S2/S3 without being
prompted for username and password.
CAS Network Port
Port of the CAS service.
Default port number: 3170
CAS Server
DNS name of the CAS service.
I It is absolutely necessary that all systems participating in the SSO
domain reference the Central Management Station (CMS) via the
same addressing representation. (An SSO Domain comprises all
systems where authentication is performed using the same CAS
service.) Thus, for example, if you have installed the ServerView
Operations Manager by using the name "my-cms.my-domain",
you must specify exactly the same name for configuring the CAS
service for an iRMC S2/S3. If, instead, you specify only "my-cms"
or another IP address of my-cms, SSO will not be enabled
between the two systems.
CAS LoginURL
Login URL of the CAS service.
CAS Logout URL
Logout URL of the CAS service.
CAS Validate URL
Validate URL of the CAS service.
Assign permissions from
Defines the iRMC S2/S3 privilege and permissions for users who are
logged in to the iRMC S2/S3 via SSO:
Local assigned permissions
The privilege and permissions defined under CAS User Privileg and
Permissions apply to the user.
iRMC S2/S3
289
User Management
Permissions retrieved via LDAP
The authorization profile defined in the LDAP directory service
applies to the user.
I The Permissions retrieved via LDAP option is only available, if LDAP
is enabled (see option "LDAP Enabled" on page 274).
CAS User Privilege and Permissions
The CAS User Privilege and Permissions group allows you to define the
iRMC S2/S3 privilege and permissions a user is granted if they are logged in at
the iRMC S2/S3 via SSO.
I The CAS User Privilege and Permissions group is not displayed if you have
selected Permissions retrieved via LDAP under Permissions assigned from in
the CAS Generic Configuration group.
Figure 174: CAS User Privilege and Permissions
Privilege
Assign a privilege group to the user here:
–
–
–
–
User
Operator
Administrator
OEM
Refer to section "User permissions" on page 68 for information on the
permissions associated with the privilege groups.
In addition to the IPMI specific permissions, you can also individually assign
users the following channel-independent permissions:
Configure User Accounts
Permission to configure local user access data.
290
iRMC S2/S3
User Management
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Permission to configure the iRMC S2/S3 settings.
Video Redirection enabled
Permission to use Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) in “View Only” and
“Full Control” mode.
Remote Storage enabled
Permission to use the Remote Storage functionality.
iRMC S2/S3
291
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
7.15
Console Redirection - Redirecting the
console
The following pages are available for console redirection:
– "BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console redirection" on
page 292.
– "Advanced Video Redirection - Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on
page 302.
7.15.1 BIOS Text Console Configure and start text console redirection
The BIOS Text Console page allows you to configure and start text console
redirection.
I Text console redirection can also be configured in the BIOS (see section
"Configuring text console redirection for the iRMC S3" on page 53).
Figure 175: BIOS Text Console page
292
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
7.15.1.1 BIOS Console Redirection Options Configure text console redirection
BIOS Console Redirection Options allows you to configure text console redirection.
Figure 176: BIOS Text Console page - BIOS Console Redirection Options
Console Redirection Enabled
This option allows you to enable / disable console redirection.
I The operating system can also permit text console redirection
irrespective of the settings in the BIOS.
Console Redirection Mode
This setting affects the behavior of console redirection while the
operating system is running (after the BIOS POST phase has completed)
- see section "Text console redirection while the operating system is
running" on page 300:
Standard
Console redirection is terminated after the BIOS POST phase.
Enhanced
Console redirection continues to be available after the BIOS
POST phase.
iRMC S2/S3
293
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Console Redirection Port
Two serial ports are available: Serial 1, Serial 2.
I If console redirection is to be performed via LAN, Serial 1 must be
set.
If Serial 2 is selected, only the connection over the null modem
cable works.
Serial Port Baud Rate
The following baud rates can be set: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200.
Serial Port Flow Control
The following settings are possible:
None
Flow control is disabled.
XON/XOFF (Software)
Flow control is handled by the software.
CTS/RTS (Hardware)
Flow control is handled by the hardware.
Terminal Emulation
The following terminal emulations are available:
VT100 7Bit, VT100 8Bit, PC-ANSI 7Bit, PC-ANSI 8 Bit, VT100+, VT-UTF8
Serial 1 Multiplexer
Check the consistency of the multiplexer settings:
– Serial: System
– LAN: iRMC S2/S3
Ê
294
Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
7.15.1.2 Text Console Redirection (via Serial over LAN) Start text console redirection
Text Console Redirection (via Serial Over LAN) allows you to start text console
redirection.
I Text console redirection via Serial over LAN (SOL) assumes that the
operating system and / or the BIOS use serial port 1 (COM1) for text
console redirection.
Figure 177: Start text console redirection via Serial over LAN (SOL).
Ê Click Start Console Redirection to start text console redirection function.
The Java applet for text console redirection is started (see figure 178 on
page 296):
iRMC S2/S3
295
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Figure 178: Window for power management and text console redirection (before login)
Ê Click Logon to log in to the iRMC S2/S3.
You are then prompted to enter your iRMC S2/S3 user name and
password:
Figure 179: Power management and text console redirection - Login window
296
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Ê Enter your user name and password and click Login to confirm.
The window for power management and text console redirection is then
displayed:
Console redirection bar Status bar
Console area
Power management bar
Login bar
Figure 180: Window for power management and text console redirection
iRMC S2/S3
297
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
The elements of the console redirection window are explained below:
Login bar
The login bar shows the IP address and current firmware version of
the iRMC S2/S3. The Login and Logout buttons allow you to log in to
and log out of the iRMC S2/S3.
Power management bar
The power management bar provides information on the power status
of the managed server. You can update the display by clicking the
Status button.
The Command drop-down list allows you to select and launch an IPMI
command for power management of the managed server (see page
page 299). You do not need to be connected with the console to do
this.
Console redirection bar
The Enter Console and Leave Console buttons in the console redirection
bar allow you to show or hide the display in the console area.
Console area
The console area contains the display from the redirected text
console.
Status bar
The status bar shows the IP address of the iRMC S2/S3 and the port
number used for console redirection. In addition, the status bar
provides information on the status of the console redirection (online /
offline).
298
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Ê Click Enter Console.
You are then connected to the console and can execute the required
command, either by entering it directly in the console area or by clicking it in
the Command drop-down list (IPMI commands only):
Enter SAC command directly.
(No confirmation prompt!)
or
Select IPMI command and
click.
A
AAA
Figure 181: Entering SAC or IPMI commands at the console.
IPMI command
Explanation
Power On
Switches the server on.
Power Off
Switches the server off.
Reset
Completely restarts the server (cold start), regardless of the status of
the operating system.
Power Cycle
Powers the server down completely and then powers it up again after
approximately 5 seconds.
Shutdown
Graceful shutdown and power off.
Ê To close the connection to the console, click Leave Console.
iRMC S2/S3
299
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
7.15.1.3 Text console redirection while the operating system is running
Depending on the operating system used on the managed server, you can
continue to use console redirection after the BIOS / UEFI POST phase.
DOS
I Condition:
The BIOS setting for console redirection mode must be set to Enhanced
(see the section "BIOS Text Console - Configure and start text console
redirection" on page 292).
If the managed server starts the PRIMERGY ServerView Suite diagnosis
software, you can operate PRIMERGY ServerView Suite diagnosis using
console redirection.
Windows Server 2003 / 2008
Windows Server 2003 / 2008 handles console redirection automatically after the
POST phase. No further settings are necessary. While the operating system is
booting, the Windows Server 2003 SAC console / Windows Server 2008 SAC
console is transferred:
Figure 182: Windows Server 2003 SAC console
Linux
You must configure a Linux operating system in such a way that it handles
console redirection after the POST phase. Once it has been configured, you
have complete remote access.
300
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Settings required
The settings may differ between program versions.
SuSe and RedHat
Add the following line to the end of the file /etc/inittab:
xx:12345:respawn:/sbin/agetty <baud-rate> ttyS0
RedHat
Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /etc/grub.conf:
console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0
SuSE
Insert the following kernel boot parameter in the file /boot/grub/menu.lst:
console=ttyS0,<baud-rate> console=tty0
iRMC S2/S3
301
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
7.15.2 Advanced Video Redirection Start Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)
The Advanced Video Redirection page allows you to start graphical console
redirection. The “Advanced Video Redirection” feature redirects graphical
output from the managed server to the remote workstation and assigns
keyboard and mouse input from the remote workstation to the managed server
so that you can access the managed server from the remote workstation as if
you were working locally.
AVR can be used by two users simultaneously. One user has full control over
the server (full-control mode) and the other can only passively observe
keyboard and mouse operation of the server (view-only mode).
I In order to use the iRMC S2/S3 function Advanced Video Redirection, you
require a license key (see section "iRMC S2/S3 Information - Information
on the iRMC S2/S3" on page 165).
The AVR functionality is made available with a Java applet.
302
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Figure 183: Advanced Video Redirection page
iRMC S2/S3
303
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Creating an ASR screenshot
The ASR Screenshot page allows you to
– take a screenshot of the current VGA screen on the managed server (video
screenshot) and store it in the firmware of the iRMC S2/S3,
– view the screenshot stored in the iRMC S2/S3 firmware,
– delete the screenshot stored in the iRMC S2/S3 firmware,
Figure 184: Creating an video screenshot
I A video screenshot is automatically created on ASR&R events - in
Windows, these are typically watchdog events or "bluescreens" on the
managed server.
A maximum of one video screenshot is stored in the firmware of the
iRMC S2/S3, namely the most recently created screenshot.
The following actions are available by clicking on one of the buttons displayed:
View Screenshot
(This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored.)
The screenshot is shown in a separate browser window.
Preview Screenshot
(This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored.)
A thumbnail of the screenshot is shown in the ASR Screenshot group.
Make Screenshot
Takes a new video screenshot.
Delete Screenshot
(This only appears if a video screenshot has been stored.)
The video screenshot stored in the iRMC S2/S3 firmware is deleted after
you have confirmed that you wish to do so.
304
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
AVR Active Session Table - Show current AVR sessions
The AVR Active Session Table lists the currently active AVR sessions. If no AVR
session is currently active then the AVR Active Session Table is not displayed.
If two AVR Sessions are currently active, a Disconnect button is displayed for
each Session.
Figure 185: AVR Active Session Table - (two active AVR sessions)
Disconnect
If you click Disconnect, a confirmation dialog box appears in which you
can close the AVR session to the left of the button.
I You can only close AVR sessions of other users with the
Disconnect button. To close your own session, choose Exit from the
Extras menu in the AVR window (see page 102).
Video Redirection Options - Deactivating USB ports on the managed
server for the duration of the AVR session
I This function is not supported for all PRIMERGY servers.
Video Redirection Options - Disable USB Port allows you to specify which USB
ports are to be disabled on the managed server for the duration of the AVR
session.
Figure 186: Video Redirection Options
iRMC S2/S3
305
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
None
No USB port will be disabled.
Front USB
Only the USB port on the front of the server will be disabled.
Rear USB
Only the USB port on the back of the server will be disabled.
Disable All
All USB ports of the server will be disabled.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
Local Monitor - Power up / down options for local server monitor
The status of the local monitor on the managed server is shown under Local
Monitor (see section "Local Monitor Off" function" on page 90).
In addition, you can configure:
– that the local monitor can be switched on and off from the remote
workstation,
– that the local monitor shuts down automatically for the duration of the AVR
session when an AVR session is started,
Figure 187: Advanced Video Redirection page - Local Monitor
306
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Enable Local Monitor Off
This option allows you to activate the following options:
– In full-control mode of an AVR session, you can switch the local
monitor on and off (AVR Extras menu, see page 102).
– For users with administrator or OEM permissions, the toggle
button Turn Off / Turn On is also enabled. This also allows the local
monitor to be switched on and off (see figure 188).
Figure 188: Advanced Video Redirection page - Local Monitor On / Off
– You can also configure that the local monitor is switched off
automatically for the duration of an AVR session when an AVR
session is started (see the Automatic Local Monitor Off when AVR is
started option).
I If no concurrent session with Local Monitor Off is active, the local
monitor is automatically switched on again when the AVR session
is closed.
Automatic Local Monitor Off when AVR is started
I This option only takes effect if Enable Local Monitor has been
activated.
If you activate this option, the local monitor is automatically switched off
for the duration of the session when an AVR session is started. After the
AVR session is closed, the local monitor is automatically switched on
again if no concurrent session with Local Monitor Off is active.
I Parallel AVR sessions:
Even if you switch on the local monitor during your AVR session
(in the AVR menu Extras or with the Turn On button), the local
monitor is automatically switched off again if a new, concurrent
AVR session is started.
The local monitor is switched on again automatically when all AVR
sessions have been closed.
Ê Click Apply to activate your settings.
iRMC S2/S3
307
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Video Redirection - Starting AVR
You start AVR under Video Redirection.
Figure 189: Advanced Video Redirection page - Local Monitor
Ê Click Start Video Redirection or Start Video Redirection (Java Web-Start) to start
a second AVR session.
The Java applet for Advanced Video Redirection is started.
I The Java applet shows the AVR window in view-only mode if another
user already uses AVR in full-control mode. Otherwise, the Java
applet shows the AVR window in full-control mode.
Figure 190: AVR window (view-only mode)
308
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
Ê Select Extras - Take Full Control... in the AVR menu (see page 103 for details),
to take over full control of the managed server.
I If you attempt to take full control of the managed server using AVR,
an already existing full-control session will be notified. by the following
dialog:
If the full-control session refuses your attempt to take full control, your
session will remain in view-only mode. Users should agree among
themselves what modes they are to use in their sessions.
If you succeeded in taking full control, the window for active use of AVR is
opened, with which you can log into the managed server (see figure 191 on
page 309).
Figure 191: AVR window (full-control mode)
The menus of the AVR window and the integrated special keys are described in
chapter "Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" on page 85.
iRMC S2/S3
309
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
The two active AVR sessions are shown as follows on the Advanced Video
Redirection page:
Figure 192: AVR window with two active AVR sessions
Disconnect
If you click Disconnect, a confirmation dialog box appears in which you
can close the AVR session to the left of the button.
I You can only close AVR sessions of other users with the
Disconnect button. To close your own session, choose Exit from the
Extras menu in the AVR window (see page 102).
310
iRMC S2/S3
Console Redirection - Redirecting the console
The following window appears if the managed server is powered down:
Figure 193: AVR window when the server is powered down
iRMC S2/S3
311
Remote Storage
7.16
Remote Storage
The Remote Storage feature provides the managed server with a “virtual” drive
which is physically located elsewhere in the network. The source for the virtual
drive can be a physical drive (floppy disk drive CD-ROM/DVD-ROM) or an ISO
image (image file).
I In order to use the iRMC S2/S3 function Remote Storage, you require a
license key (see page 167).
You can make the remote storage media available as follows:
– As a physical drive or image file at the remote workstation (see page 113).
The image file may also be a network drive (with drive letter, e.g. “D:” for
drive D).
– As an image file centrally in the network via a remote storage server (see
page 127).
I Parallel remote storage connections:
The following are possible concurrently:
– either up to two Remote Storage connections to virtual drives at the
remote workstation (if the connection is established over the AVR
Java applet) or
– one Remote Storage connection to a Remote Storage server.
Remote storage connections via applet and Remote Storage Server are
not possible simultaneously.
The Remote Storage page allows you to display information on the status of the
current remote storage connections and establish the connection to a remote
storage server.
312
iRMC S2/S3
Remote Storage
Figure 194: Remote Storage page
Remote Storage Connection Status
Displays the status of the remote storage connection:
No
Displays the sequential number of the remote storage device.
IP Address
Displays the IP address of the server or workstation on which the remote
storage device is installed.
Share Index
Displays the number assigned to the remote storage connection.
Share Origin
Displays the status of the remote storage device on a server or on a
remote workstation:
– Applet: Connectable
– None: Not connectable (Not found)
iRMC S2/S3
313
Remote Storage
Share Status
Displays the current status of the connection:
– Connected: Connected
– Idle: Not connected
Remote Storage Server
Allows you to specify a computer on which a remote storage server is installed.
No
Displays the sequential number of the remote storage server.
IP Address or DNS Name
Specifies the IP address or the registered DNS name of the computer on
which a remote storage server is installed.
Apply
Click Apply to save the remote storage server’s IP address or DNS name.
Connect
Click Apply to save the remote storage server’s IP address or DNS name
and establish the connection to the remote storage server.
I Before it is possible to establish the connection to the remote
storage server the remote storage server must be installed and
running.
Disconnect
Click Disconnect to terminate the connection to the remote storage server.
314
iRMC S2/S3
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
7.17
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH
(Remote Manager)
A Telnet / SSH-based interface is available for the iRMC S2/S3. This is known
as the Remote Manager. The alphanumeric user interface of the Remote
Manager provides you with access to system and sensor information, power
management functions and the error event log. You can also start text console
redirection and a SMASH CLP shell.
You can call the Remote Manager from the iRMC S2/S3 web interface as
follows:
– Use the iRMC S2/S3 SSH Access link to initiate an SSH (Secure Shell)
encrypted Telnet connection to the iRMC S2/S3.
– Use the iRMC S2/S3 Telnet Access link to initiate an unencrypted Telnet
connection to the iRMC S2/S3.
Calling the Remote Manager from the iRMC S2/S3 web interface automatically
starts a Java applet, which implements a Telnet / SSH client. Telnet / SSH
access to Remote Manager using the Java applet is provided for convenience
(e.g. no SSH client is supplied together with Windows operating systems).
However, to access the Remote Manager, you can use any Telnet or SSH
Client.
I If you establish an SSH connection using the Java applet, public key
authentication is not supported.
I Maximum number of parallel sessions:
– Telnet: up to 4
– SSH: up to 4
– Telnet and SSH in total: up to 4
Operation of the iRMC S2/S3 using the Remote Manager is described in
chapter "iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet/SSH (Remote Manager)" on page 321.
Requirements on the managed server
Access via Telnet must be activated for the iRMC S2/S3 (see the section "Ports
and Network Services - Configuring ports and network services" on page 245).
I Access via the Telnet protocol is deactivated by default for security
reasons, as passwords are transmitted in plain text.
iRMC S2/S3
315
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
Establishing an SSH / Telnet connection and logging into the
Remote Manager
I If the screen displays for SSH and Telnet connections differ only with
respect to the connection-specific information displayed, the display for
an SSH connection is shown below.
Ê In the navigation bar, click on the link iRMC S2/S3 SSH Access (SSH) or iRMC
S2/S3 Telnet Access (Telnet).
The Java applet for the SSH or Telnet connection is started and the following
window is displayed (in this case using the example of an SSH connection):
Figure 195: Establishing an SSH connection to the iRMC S2/S3
316
iRMC S2/S3
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
Ê In the connection bar, click Connect.
As soon as the connection to the iRMC S2/S3 has been established, you are
requested to enter the user name and password.
– Logging into the Remote Manager over an SSH connection
I If the host key of the managed server is not yet registered at the
remote workstation, the SSH client issues a security alert with
suggestions on how to proceed.
The following login window is displayed:
Figure 196: SSH connection: Logging in to the Remote Manager
Ê Enter your user name and password and confirm your entries by
clicking Login.
The main menu of the Remote Manager is then displayed (see
figure 198 on page 319).
iRMC S2/S3
317
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
– Logging into the Remote Manager over a Telnet connection
The Remote Manager login window is displayed:
Figure 197: Telnet connection: Logging in to the Remote Manager
I Depending on whether ServerView agents have already been
started at some point on the system, the login window is shown
with or without system information (see page 326).
Ê Enter your user name and password and confirm your entries by
pressing [Enter].
The main menu of the Remote Manager is then displayed (see
figure 198 on page 319).
318
iRMC S2/S3
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
Figure 198: Main menu of the Remote Manager
Closing a Telnet / SSH connection
Ê Close the connection to the Remote Manager by clicking the Disconnect
button in the connection bar of the Remote Manager window or by pressing
the [0] key in the main menu of the Remote Manager (see figure 198).
iRMC S2/S3
319
Operating iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet / SSH (Remote Manager)
320
iRMC S2/S3
8
iRMC S2/S3 via Telnet/SSH
(Remote Manager)
A Telnet-based interface is available for the iRMC S2/S3. This is known as the
Remote Manager. You can call the Remote Manager over the following
interfaces:
– iRMC S2/S3 web interface (see page 315)
– any Telnet/SSH client
The iRMC S2/S3 supports secure connections over SSH (Secure Shell). The
Remote Manager interface is identical for Telnet and SSH connections. In
principle, any Telnet/SSH client that interprets VT100 sequences can be used
to access the iRMC S2/S3. It is nevertheless recommended that the
iRMC S2/S3 web interface or the ServerView Remote Management Frontend
(referred to below simply as the Remote Management Frontend) be used.
I Maximum number of parallel sessions:
– Telnet: up to 4
– SSH: up to 4
– Telnet and SSH in total: up to 4
This chapter describes operation of the iRMC S2/S3 from the Remote Manager
and the various functions in detail. The end of the chapter also provides a brief
overview of SMASH CLP.
iRMC S2/S3
321
Requirements on the managed server
8.1
Requirements on the managed server
Access via Telnet must be activated for the iRMC S2/S3 (see the section "Ports
and Network Services - Configuring ports and network services" on page 245).
I Access via the Telnet protocol is deactivated by default for security
reasons, as passwords are transmitted in plain text.
I Since the ServerView Operations Manager does not know the value of
the management port, the Remote Management Frontend works with the
default value.
Since a connection is not automatically established when the Remote
Management Frontend is started, you can correct any nonstandard value
for the management port after the Remote Management Frontend has
been started.
322
iRMC S2/S3
Operating Remote Manager
8.2
Operating Remote Manager
Operation of Remote view is described on the basis of the example in
figure 199, which shows an excerpt from the main menu of the Remote
Manager.
Figure 199: Operating the Remote Manager
Ê Select the required menu item by entering the number or letter which
precedes the menu item, e.g. “c” for “Change password”.
Functions that the user is not permitted to use are indicated by a dash (-)
and functions that are not available are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Ê Press [0] or the key combination [Ctrl] [D] to close the Remote Manager. An
appropriate event will be written to the event log.
iRMC S2/S3
323
Overview of menus
8.3
Overview of menus
The Remote Manager menu for the iRMC S2/S3 has the following structure:
●
System Information
– View Chassis Information
– View Mainboard Information
– View OS and SNMP Information
– Set ASSET Tag
●
Power Management
– Immediate Power Off
– Immediate Reset
– Power Cycle
– Power on
– Graceful Power Off (Shutdown)
– Graceful Reset (Reboot)
– Raise NMI (via iRMC S2/S3)
●
Enclosure Information
– System Eventlog
– View System Eventlog (text, newest first)
– View System Eventlog (text, oldest first)
– Dump System Eventlog (raw, newest first)
– Dump System Eventlog (raw, oldest first)
– View System Eventlog Information
– Clear System Eventlog
324
iRMC S2/S3
Overview of menus
– Internal Eventlog
– View Internal Eventlog (text, newest last)
– Dump Internal Eventlog (raw, newest last)
– View Internal Eventlog Information
– Clear Internal Eventlog
– Change Internal Eventlog mode
– Temperature
– Voltages/Current
– Fans
– Power Supplies
– Memory Sensor
– Door Lock
– CPU Sensors
– Component Status (Lightpath)
– List All Sensors
●
Service Processor
– Configure IP Parameters
– List IP Parameters
– Toggle Identify LED
– Reset iRMC S2/S3 (Warm reset)
– Reset iRMC S2/S3 (Cold reset)
●
Change password
●
Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)
●
Start a Command Line shell
●
Console Logging
iRMC S2/S3
325
Logging in
8.4
Logging in
When connecting to the iRMC S2/S3, you are required to enter your login
credentials (username and password). As soon as a connection to the
iRMC S2/S3 has been established, the main menu window of the Remote
Manager (Telnet/SSH window) is displayed at the terminal client at the remote
workstation.
Depending on whether ServerView agents have already been started at some
point on the system, the main window is shown with or without system
information.
I When logging in over an SSH connection: If the host key of the managed
server is not yet registered at the remote workstation, the SSH client
issues a security alert with suggestions on how to proceed.
Figure 200: Remote Manager: Main menu window (with system information)
326
iRMC S2/S3
Logging in
Figure 201: Remote Manager: Main menu window (without system information)
The Remote Manager window contains information on the affected system. This
information identifies the server and indicates its operating status (Power
Status). Some details (e.g. the System Name) are only shown for servers and
only if the server is configured appropriately.
Ê In order to be able to use the Remote Manager, you must log in with a user
name and a password.
Then an appropriate event will be written to the Event log and the relevant
main menu of the Remote Manager displayed (see section "Main menu of
the Remote Manager" on page 328).
You can terminate the login process at any time using [Ctrl][D].
iRMC S2/S3
327
Main menu of the Remote Manager
8.5
Main menu of the Remote Manager
Figure 202: Remote Manager: Main menu
The main menu of the Remote Manager provides the following functions:
System Information...
View information on the managed
server and set the Asset Tag
(see section "System Information Information on the managed server"
on page 332).
Power Management...
Power the server up or down.
(see section "Power Management" on
page 334).
Enclosure Information...
Request information on the current
system status, e.g. check error and
event messages from the error log
and event log (temperature, fan, etc.)
(see section "Enclosure Information System event log and status of the
sensors" on page 335).
Table 8: Main menu of the Remote Manager
328
iRMC S2/S3
Main menu of the Remote Manager
Service Processor...
Configure the iRMC S2/S3iRMC
S2/S3 (e.g. update firmware or
change IP address)
(see section "Service processor - IP
parameters, identification LED and
iRMC S2/S3 reset" on page 339).
Change password
Change the password
(see section "Change the password"
on page 332).
Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)
Text console redirection
(see section "Console Redirection
(EMS/SAC) - Start text console
redirection" on page 340).
Start a Command Line shell...
Start a command line shell
(see section "Start a Command Line
shell... - Start a SMASH CLP shell" on
page 340).
Console Logging
Redirect output of messages to the
text console
(see section "Console Logging Redirect message output to the text
console (serial)" on page 341).
Table 8: Main menu of the Remote Manager
iRMC S2/S3
329
Required user permissions
8.6
Required user permissions
In table 9 is given an overview of the user permissions which are required in
order to use the individual Remote Manager functions.
X
Set ASSET Tag
X
1)
X
Set System Name 1)
X
Set System Operating System Information
Set System Description
Remote Storage Enabled
X
Video Redirection Enabled
X
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
User
X
View Chassis / M ainboard, / OS Information
Required
permission
Configure User Accounts
Operator
View System Information...
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Remote Manager menu items
1)
X
1)
X
Set System Location Information (SNMP)1)
X
1)
Set System Contact Information (SNMP)
X
Power Management...
X
X
X
View Enclosure Information
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
System Eventlog - View/Dump System Eventlog
System Eventlog - Clear System Eventlog
X
X
X
Internal Eventlog - View/Dump Internal Eventlog
X
X
X
X
Internal Eventlog - Clear Internal Eventlog
X
X
X
X
Sensor overviews (Temperature, Fans ...)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
View Service Processor...
Service Processor... - List IP Parameters
X
Table 9: Permissions to use the Remote Manager menus
330
iRMC S2/S3
Required user permissions
Service Processor... - Configure IP Parameters
Remote Storage Enabled
Video Redirection Enabled
X
Service Processor... - Toggle Identify LED
X
X
Service Proc. ... - Reset iRMC S2/S3 (warm/cold reset)
X
X
X
Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)
X
X
X
Start a command Line shell...
X
X
X
Console Logging
X
X
X
X
X
Change Password
1)
Configure iRMC S2/S3 Settings
Required
permission
Configure User Accounts
User
Operator
Administrator
Permitted with
IPMI privilege
level
OEM
Remote Manager menu items
X
Action is only possible if no agents are running.
Table 9: Permissions to use the Remote Manager menus
iRMC S2/S3
331
Change the password
8.7
Change the password
The Change password menu item allows a user with the privilege Configure User
Accounts (see page 68) to change their own password or the passwords of other
users.
8.8
System Information Information on the managed server
The following menu appears if you choose System Information... from the main
menu:
Figure 203: Remote Manager: System Information menu
The submenu contains the following functions:
View Chassis Information
Information on the chassis of the managed
server and its product data.
View Mainboard Information
Information on the mainboard of the managed
server and its product data.
View OS and SNMP Information Information on the operating system and the
ServerView version of the managed server and
on the SNMP settings.
Table 10: System Information menu
332
iRMC S2/S3
System Information - Information on the managed server
Set ASSET Tag
Sets a customer-specific asset tag for the
managed server.
Table 10: System Information menu
iRMC S2/S3
333
Power Management
8.9
Power Management
The following menu appears if you choose Power Management... from the main
menu:
Figure 204: Remote Manager: Power Management menu
The submenu contains the following functions:
Immediate Power Off
Powers the server down, regardless of the status of
the operating system.
Immediate Reset
Completely restarts the server (cold start),
regardless of the status of the operating system.
Power Cycle
Powers the server down completely and then
powers it up again after a configured period.
Power On
Switches the server on.
Graceful Power Off
(Shutdown)
Graceful shutdown and power off.
This menu item is only available if ServerView
agents are installed and signed onto the
iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
Graceful Reset (Reboot)
Graceful shutdown and reboot.
This menu item is only available if ServerView
agents are installed and signed onto the
iRMC S2/S3 as “Connected”.
Raise NMI
(via iRMC S2/S3)
Initiates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) via
iRMC S2/S3
Table 11: Power Management menu
334
iRMC S2/S3
Enclosure Information
8.10
Enclosure Information System event log and status of the sensors
The following menu appears if you choose Enclosure Information... from the main
menu:
Figure 205: Remote Manager: Enclosure Information menu
iRMC S2/S3
335
Enclosure Information
The submenu contains the following functions:
System Eventlog
Call the System Eventlog menu (see the section "System
Eventlog" on page 337).
Internal Eventlog
Call the internal Eventlog menu (see the section
"Internal Eventlog" on page 338).
Temperature
Display information on the temperature sensors and
their status.
Voltages/Current
Display information on the voltage and current sensors
and their status.
Fans
Display information on the fans and their status.
Power Supplies
Display information on the power supplies and their
redundancy status.
Door Lock
Display information on whether the front panel or
housing are open.
Memory Sensors
Display information on the memory statuses.
CPU Sensors
Localize the processors of the server.
Component Status
Display detailed information on all sensors that have a
PRIMERGY diagnostic LED.
List All Sensors
Display detailed information on all sensors.
Table 12: Enclosure Information menu
336
iRMC S2/S3
Enclosure Information
System Eventlog
The following menu appears if you select System Eventlog from the Enclosure
Information... submenu:
Figure 206: Remote Manager: System Eventlog menu
The submenu contains the following functions:
View System Eventlog
(text, newest first)
The contents of the System Event log are output to
screen in a readable form and in chronological order
(the most recent entry first).
View System Eventlog
(text, oldest first)
The contents of the System Event log are output to
screen in a readable form and in reverse chronological
order (the oldest entry first).
Dump System Eventlog The contents of the System Event log are dumped in
(raw, newest first)
chronological order (the most recent entry first).
Dump System Eventlog The contents of the System Event log are dumped in
(raw, oldest first)
reverse chronological order (the oldest entry first).
View System Eventlog
Information
Display information on the System Event log.
Clear System Eventlog
Clear the contents of the System Event log.
Change System
Eventlog mode
Changes the buffer mode of the System Event Log
from Ring Buffer mode to Linear Buffer mode and vice
versa.
Table 13: System Eventlog menu
iRMC S2/S3
337
Enclosure Information
Internal Eventlog
The following menu appears if you select Internal Eventlog from the Enclosure
Information... submenu:
Figure 207: Remote Manager: Internal Eventlog menu
The submenu contains the following functions:
View Internal Eventlog The contents of the internal event log are output to
(text, newest last)
screen in a readable form and in reverse chronological
order (the most recent entry last).
Dump Internal
Eventlog (raw, newest
last )
The contents of the internal event log are dumped in
reverse chronological order (the most recent entry
last).
View Internal Eventlog Display information on the internal event log.
Information
Clear Internal Eventlog Clear the contents of the internal event log.
Change Internal
Eventlog mode
Changes the buffer mode of the internal event log from
Ring Buffer mode to Linear Buffer mode and vice versa.
Table 14: Internal Eventlog menu
338
iRMC S2/S3
Service Processor
8.11
Service processor - IP parameters,
identification LED and iRMC S2/S3 reset
The following menu appears if you choose Service Processor... from the main
menu:
Figure 208: Remote Manager: Service Processor menu
The submenu contains the following functions:
Configure IP Parameters
Configure the IPv4 / IPv6 address settings of the
iRMC S2/S3 in a guided dialog. Please refer to
section "Network Interface Settings - Configure
Ethernet settings on the iRMC S2/S3" on page 239
for details in the individual settings.
List IP Parameters
Display the IP settings.
Toggle Identify LED
Switch the PRIMERGY identification LED on/off.
Reset iRMC S2/S3
(Warm reset)
Reset the iRMC S2/S3. The connection is closed.
Only the interfaces are re-initialized.
Reset iRMC S2/S3
(Cold reset)
Reset the iRMC S2/S3. The connection is closed.
The entire iRMC S2/S3 is re-initialized.
Table 15: Service Processor menu
I It is recommended that you reboot the server after a Reset iRMC S2/S3
(Cold Reset) or Reset iRMC S2/S3 (Warm Reset) (see page 189).
iRMC S2/S3
339
Console Redirection (EMS/SAC)
8.12
Console Redirection (EMS/SAC) Start text console redirection
You can start console redirection with the Console Redirection (EMS/SAC) item
from the main menu.
I Text-based console redirection only works over the LAN with Serial 1.
If console redirection is also to be used while the operating system is
running, the Serial 1 Multiplexer must be set to System.
I Use the keyboard shortcut "<ESC>(" or "~." (tilde dot) to exit the text
console.
It is possible that only one of these options will work, depending on the
type of PRIMERGY server used.
8.13
Start a Command Line shell... Start a SMASH CLP shell
Start a Command Line shell... in the main menu allows you to start a SMASH CLP
shell. SMASH CLP stands for “Systems Management Architecture for Server
Hardware Command Line Protocol”. This protocol permits a Telnet- or SSHbased connection between the management station and the managed server.
For further details on SMASH CLP, please refer to section "Command Line
Protocol (CLP)" on page 343.
When you select (s) Start a Command Line shell... from the main menu, the
following window appears:
Figure 209: Remote Manager: Start a SMASH CLP shell... menu
Ê Choose (1) Start a SMASH CLP shell... to start the SMASH CLP shell.
340
iRMC S2/S3
Console Logging
8.14
Console Logging - Redirect message
output to the text console (serial)
The Console Logging item in the main menu allows you to redirect message
output (logging) to the text console (serial interface).
When you select (l) Console Logging from the main menu, the following window
appears:
Figure 210: Remote Manager: Console Logging menu
The submenu contains the following functions:
Change Logging Run state
Show and change the logging run state.
For a more detailed description, see
"Console Logging Run State Menu" on
page 342
Clear Console Logging buffer
Clear the console logging buffer.
Replay Console (Fast mode)
Show the console log (in fast mode)
Replay Console (Continuous mode) Show the console log
(in continuous mode)
Table 16: Console Logging menu
iRMC S2/S3
341
Console Logging
Console Logging Run State Menu
Figure 211: Remote Manager: Console Logging Run State menu
The Console Logging Run State Menu provides the following functions:
Start Console Logging
Start output of messages to the text console.
Stop Console Logging
Stop output of messages to the text console.
Toggle to Text Mode
Switch to text mode.
All escape sequences are filtered out before messages
are output to the console.
Toggle to Normal Mode Switch to normal mode.
In normal mode, only the following escape sequences
are filtered out before messages are output to the
console:
<ESC>(
<ESC>stop
<ESC>Q
<ESC>R<ESC>r<ESC>R
<ESC>^
This means that color, pseudo-graphics, etc. can also
be represented to a limited extent.
Table 17: Console Logging Run State menu
342
iRMC S2/S3
Command Line Protocol (CLP)
8.15
Command Line Protocol (CLP)
The iRMC S2/S3 supports various text-based user interfaces, known as user
shells, which can be configured differently for individual users.
The System Management Architecture for Server Hardware (SMASH) initiative
defines a number of specifications with the following objectives:
– Provision of standardized interfaces for managing heterogeneous computer
environments,
– Provision of an architecture framework with uniform interfaces, hardware
and software discovery, resource addressing and data models.
You can find further information on SMASH under the following link:
http://www.dmtf.org/standards/smash
SMASH CLP syntax
SMASH CLP specifies a common command line syntax and message protocol
semantics for managing computers on the Internet and in enterprise and
service provider environments. You can find detailed information on SMASH
CLP in the DMTF document “Server Management Command Line Protocol
Specification (SM CLP) DSP0214”.
The general syntax of the CLP is as follows:
<verb> [<options>] [<target>] [<properties>]
<verb>
Verbs specify the command or action to be executed. The list of verbs
describes the following activities, for instance:
– Establish (set) and retrieve (show) data,
– Change the status of a target (reset, start, stop),
– Manage the current session (cd, version, exit),
– Return information on commands (help).
In iRMC S2/S3 systems, the verb oemfujitsu also allows the use of special
OEM commands.
iRMC S2/S3
343
Command Line Protocol (CLP)
<options>
Command options modify the action or the behavior of a verb. Options
can immediately follow the verb in a command line and must always be
introduced by a dash ("-").
Options allow you to, for instance,
– define the output format,
– permit recursive execution of a command,
– display the version of a command or
– request help.
<target>
<target> specifies the address or the path of the object to be manipulated
by the command, i.e. the target of the command. This can be a single
managed element such as a hard disk, a network adapter (Network
Interface Card, NIC), or the management program (Management
Assistance Program, MAP) itself. Targets can, however, also be services
such as a transport service.
Several managed elements which can be managed by the management
program can be subsumed under a single <target>, for instance the
entire system.
Only one <target> may be specified for each command.
<properties>
<properties> describe the properties of the target of the command which
are required to execute the command. Thus, <properties> identify the
properties of the target’s class that are to be retrieved or modified by the
command.
344
iRMC S2/S3
Command Line Protocol (CLP)
User data in the CLP (overview)
Data within the CLP is structured hierarchically. The command cd allows you to
navigate within this structure.
An overview of the user data in the CLP is shown in figure 212. The names in
rectangles indicate command targets. On every level of the hierarchy, the
command/verb show displays the available targets, properties and verbs.
/./root
system 1
map 1
log 1
record 1
firmware
record n
user 1
accounts
nic 1
oemsensors
oemsefru
user 16
Figure 212: Structure of the user data in SMASH CLP
Hierarchy of the CLP commands
An overview of the CLP command hierarchy is shown in table 18 on page 346.
iRMC S2/S3
345
Command Line Protocol (CLP)
Table 18: Hierarchy of the CLP commands
346
iRMC S2/S3
9
Configuring iRMC S2/S3 using
the Server Configuration
Manager
You can use the Server Configuration Manager to
– configure the iRMC S2/S3,
– configure and manage user IDs at the iRMC S2/S3,
– configure a directory service on the iRMC S2/S3,
– configure the CAS service on the iRMC S2/S3.
I Requirements:
The current ServerView agents must be installed on the managed server.
The Server Configuration Manager functions can be accessed in the following
ways:
– Locally on managed servers using the ServerView Installation Manager.
– Locally on managed Windows-based servers using the Windows Start
menu.
I This is only supported for servers on which the ServerView agents for
Windows are installed.
– On the remote workstation using the graphical interface of the Operations
Manager.
I This is only supported for servers on which the ServerView agents for
Windows are installed.
This chapter in detail describes the various ways to call the Server Configuration
Manager.
I For details on the Configuration Manager dialog pages, please refer to
the online help of the Server Configuration Manager.
iRMC S2/S3
347
Configuring via Server Configuration Manager
9.1
Calling the Server Configuration Manager
from the ServerView Installation Manager
You can call the Server Configuration Manager from the ServerView Installation
Manager (Installation Manager for short). Configuration via the Installation
Manager is of significance when installing the server. The Installation Manager
makes the Server Configuration Manager available both during preparation for
installation and as a separate maintenance program. The Installation Manager
is described in the manual “ServerView Installation Manager”.
9.2
Calling the Server Configuration Manager
from the Windows Start menu
On Windows-based servers, you can also call the Server Configuration
Manager via the Windows Start menu.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Ê On the managed server, select:
Start – All Programs – Fujitsu – ServerView – Agents – Configuration Tools –
System Configuration.
The System Configuration window opens:
Figure 213: System Configuration window
348
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring via Server Configuration Manager
Ê Accept the preset values.
Ê Click OK.
The tab view of the System Configuration window opens.
You can scroll to the left and right through the tabs by clicking the arrows next
to the tabs.
Applying settings
To apply the settings made in the individual tabs, proceed as follows for each
tab:
Ê Click the Apply button.
Ê Click the Save Page button.
The iRMC S2/S3 automatically reboots to activate the changed settings.
iRMC S2/S3
349
Configuring via Server Configuration Manager
9.3
alling the Server Configuration Manager
from the Operations Manager
The Server Configuration Manager dialog boxes for configuring the iRMC S2/S3
are also available from the graphical user interface of the Operations Manager.
This allows you to configure the iRMC S2/S3 of the managed server from the
remote workstation via a Web interface.
Proceed as follows:
Ê Start the Operations Manager (refer to the manual “ServerView Operations
Manager”).
The start window of the Operations Manager opens:
Figure 214: Operations Manager: Start window
350
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring via Server Configuration Manager
Ê Choose Server Configuration from the Administration menu of the Operations
Manager start window.
This opens the following window:
Figure 215: Operations Manager: Server Configuration window - Server list (1) tab
iRMC S2/S3
351
Configuring via Server Configuration Manager
Ê In the hierarchy tree of the Server list tab, select the server to be configured.
This opens the following window:
Figure 216: Operations Manager: Server Configuration window - Server list (2) tab
Ê In the right-hand side of the window, specify the details on the selected
server and confirm your entries by clicking GO... .
The first dialog of the Server Configuration manager appears.
352
iRMC S2/S3
10
Firmware update
This chapter provides you with information about the following topics:
– iRMC S2/S3 firmware (overview)
– Creating a memory stick for updating the firmware
– Updating firmware images
– Emergency flash
– flash tools
I The current firmware versions are present on the ServerView Suite DVD 1
or can be downloaded manually from the Download section of the Fujitsu
Technology Solutions web server.
You can obtain the up-to-date version of the ServerView Suite DVD 1 at
two-monthly intervals.
I Besides the possibility of performing a firmware update, you can also
downgrade the firmware to the previous version.
I Before updating or downgrading the firmware, read the supplementary
documentation supplied with the new firmware carefully (in particular the
Readme files).
I Servers with iRMC S2 must be rebooted to activate the updated /
downgraded firmware. For servers with iRMC S3, no reboot is required
to activate the updated / downgraded firmware.
V CAUTION!
When updating / downgrading the firmware, note that the problem-free
operation of the firmware can only be guaranteed if the runtime firmware
and the SDR (Sensor Data Record, see page 355) both belong to the
same firmware release.
iRMC S2/S3
353
iRMC S2/S3 firmware (overview)
10.1
iRMC S2/S3 firmware (overview)
The iRMC S2/S3 uses two different firmware images. The two firmware images
are stored on a 16-MB EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ReadOnly Memory):
– Firmware image 1 (low FW image)
– Firmware image 2 (high FW image)
The firmware of the iRMC S2/S3 is not executed in the EEPROM, but is instead
loaded into SRAM memory on startup and executed there. This means that it is
possible to update both active and inactive firmware images online, i.e. with the
server operating system (Windows or Linux) running.
I If an error occurs while loading the firmware from one of the images, the
firmware is automatically loaded from the other image.
I Information on the iRMC S2/S3 firmware and EEPROM can be found
– in the iRMC S2/S3 web interface, page iRMC S2/S3 Information (see
page 164) or
– using the flash tool (see page 368).
Active and passive firmware image
One of the two firmware images is active (running) at any given time, while the
other is inactive. The firmware image that is active depends on the so-called
firmware selector (see page 356).
354
iRMC S2/S3
iRMC S2/S3 firmware (overview)
Structure of the iRMC S2/S3 EEPROM
The EEPROM of the iRMC S2/S3 contains one area for firmware image 1 and
one area for firmware image 2:
Runtime firmware
8 MB for
firmware image 2
SDRR (and configuration table)
not used
Runtime firmware
8 MB for
firmware image 1
SDRR (and configuration table)
Bootloader
Figure 217: Structure of the iRMC S2/S3 EEPROM
– Bootloader
The bootloader checks the firmware image that is currently active. If a
firmware error is detected, the bootloader sets the firmware selector to the
other firmware image.
– SDRR (Sensor Data Record Repository)
The SDRR contains the Sensor Data Records (SDR) in which sensor
information for the managed server is stored. The SDRR also acts as an
interface via which you can access the SDRs.
– Runtime firmware
The runtime firmware is the executable part of the iRMC S2/S3's firmware.
You can perform a firmware update for each of these areas.
iRMC S2/S3
355
iRMC S2/S3 firmware (overview)
Firmware selector
The firmware selector specifies the iRMC S2/S3 firmware to be executed. Every
time the iRMC S2/S3 is reset and restarted, the firmware selector is evaluated
and processing branches to the corresponding firmware.
The firmware selector can have the following values:
0
Firmware image containing the most recent firmware version
1
firmware image 1
2
firmware image 2
3
Firmware image containing the oldest firmware version
4
Firmware image most recently updated
5
Firmware image that has been updated least recently
I Depending on the update variant used, the firmware selector is set
differently after the update.
You can query and explicitly set the firmware selector
– on the iRMC S2/S3 Information page of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
(see "Running Firmware" on page 166)
or
– using the flash tool (see page 368).
356
iRMC S2/S3
Setting up the USB memory stick
10.2
Setting up the USB memory stick
I You do not need the USB memory stick if you update the firmware of the
iRMC S2/S3 in one of the following ways:
– using the ServerView Update Manager
– using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP
– using the iRMC S2/S3 web interface and TFTP server
Proceed as follows:
Ê Download the firmware iRMC Firmware Update for USB Stick from the
Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web server to a
directory on your computer.
The ZIP archive FTS_<spec>.zip can be found in your download directory.
(The <spec> part of the name provides information on the system type,
system board, firmware/SDRR version etc.)
The ZIP archive includes the following files:
– USBImage.exe
– iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.exe
– iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.IMA
Ê Connect the USB memory stick to your computer.
Ê Start the file iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.exe or the file USBImag.exe.
One of the following windows is opened depending on the file you call (see
figure 218 on page 358):
iRMC S2/S3
357
Setting up the USB memory stick
Figure 218: Copying the image file to the USB memory stick
(with iRMC_<Firmware version.exe))
Figure 219: Copying the image file to the USB memory stick (with USBImage.exe)
I If you have called USBImag.exe, then under Image File:, you must
explicitly specify the file iRMC_<Firmware-Version>.IMA.
Ê Click Clear USB Device to delete the data from the USB memory stick.
358
iRMC S2/S3
Setting up the USB memory stick
Ê Click Copy Image File to USB Device to copy the file
BMC_<Firmware-Version>.IMA to the USB memory stick and extract it.
V CAUTION!
This action overwrites the content of the USB memory stick.
When the copy operation is complete, the flash tools and image files are present
on the USB memory stick.
Figure 220: Image files and flash tool on the USB memory stick.
iRMC S2/S3
359
Updating firmware images
10.3
Updating firmware images
Since the iRMC S2/S3 firmware executes in the SRAM memory of the
iRMC S2/S3, it is possible to update both active and inactive firmware images
online, i.e. with the server operating system running.
The following methods are available for updating the firmware images:
– over the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
– using the ServerView Update Manager
– using ServerView Update Manager Express or ASP
– Update using the operating system flash tools.
Downgrading the firmware to the previous version
Besides the possibility of performing a firmware update, you can also
downgrade the firmware to the previous version.
The simplest way to downgrade the firmware is to store the previous-version
firmware image as the inactive firmware image in the EEPROM of the
iRMC S2/S3. In this case, you only have to set the firmware selector to this
previous-version image (see page 182) and subsequently restart the
iRMC S2/S3 to activate the firmware.
I You can also downgrade the firmware by applying the methods described
in the following sections. In these cases, you perform a firmware update
based on the firmware of the previous version. Special requirements to
perform the downgrade are pointed out separately in the following
sections.
10.3.1 Update via the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
The iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update page allows you to update the firmware of the
iRMC S2/S3 by providing the firmware image either locally on the remote
workstation or on a TFTP server (see section "iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Update"
on page 181).
360
iRMC S2/S3
Updating firmware images
10.3.2
Update using the ServerView Update Manager
Using the ServerView Update Manager, you can start the update of the
iRMC S2/S3 firmware via a graphical user interface or via a command line
interface (Windows and Linux). The ServerView Update Manager accesses the
update data via its Update Repository on the ServerView Suite DVD 1 or on the
management server. You update the update repository on the management
server by means of the Download Manager or by performing a manual
download from the Download section of the Fujitsu Technology Solutions web
server.
For more detailed information on firmware updates with the ServerView Update
Manager, see the “ServerView Update Manager” manual.
iRMC S2/S3
361
Updating firmware images
10.3.3 Online update using ServerView Update Manager
Express or ASP
Under Windows and Linux operating systems, you can update the iRMC S2/S3
firmware either using the graphical user interface of ServerView Update
Manager Express or by using the ASP (Autonomous Support Package)
command interface.
Under Windows, you can also start an ASP in the Windows Explorer by doubleclicking the corresponding ASP-*.exe file.
I When downgrading the firmware, please note:
– Downgrade via Update Manager Express:
The firmware downgrade is only feasible in the Expert mode. In
addition, the Downgrade option must be activated.
– Downgrade via ASP:
– Under Windows:
You can perform the downgrade if you start the ASP by doubleclicking the corresponding *.exe file. When starting the ASP via the
CLI, you must explicitly specify the Force=yes option.
– Under Linux:
You must explicitly specify option -f or option --force.
For more detailed information on firmware updates with Update Manager
Express and ASP, see the “Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers”
manual.
362
iRMC S2/S3
Updating firmware images
10.3.4 Update using the operating system flash tools.
I An online update using the operating system flash tools is only
performed as a recovery flash, i.e. no version check is performed.
I Prerequisite:
The flash tools and the files for the firmware update must be present in
the file system of the managed server.
You use one of the following flash tools, depending on the operating system you
are running:
DOS:
flirmcs2
Windows:
winflirmcs2
Prerequisite:
The ServerView agents for the used Windows operation
system (32/64 bit) must be running on the managed server.
Windows (32 bit): win32flirmcs2 (No agents required.)
Windows (64 bit): win64flirmcs2 (No agents required.)
Linux:
linflirmcs2
You call the flash tools in the Windows command line (flirmcs2, win32flirmcs2,
win64flirmcs2, winflirmcs2) or at the Linux CLI (linflirmcs2).
The syntax and operands for the flash tools are described in section "Flash
tools" on page 368.
iRMC S2/S3
363
Updating firmware images
Proceed as follows:
I An online update using a USB memory stick is described below (see
section "Setting up the USB memory stick" on page 357).
Ê Connect the USB memory stick to the managed server.
Ê In the Windows command line or the Linux Command Line Interface (CLI)
switch to the drive corresponding to the USB memory stick.
Ê Set the firmware selector to the value 4 by calling the flash tool with the
parameter /s 4.
E.g., in the Windows command line you enter:
WinFLIRMCS2 /s 4
Ê Start the update of the firmware and the SDR data by calling the flash tool
with the corresponding update files.
E.g., in the Windows command line you enter:
WinFLIRMCS2 dcod<firmware-version>.bin <nnnnnnn>.sdr /i
During the firmware update, the console informs you about the progress of
the update operation. If an error occurs, the update operation is aborted and
a corresponding return code is reported (see page 370).
Ê Restart the managed server. This automatically activates the firmware
image with the updated firmware.
364
iRMC S2/S3
Updating firmware images
10.3.5 Update via the lashDisk menu
I For an update via the FlashDisk menu, you require a bootable USB
memory stick (see section "Setting up the USB memory stick" on
page 357).
Proceed as follows:
Ê Connect the USB memory stick to the managed server (directly or via
remote storage).
Ê Boot from the USB memory stick.
After completion of the boot operation, the data in the USB memory stick is
automatically copied to a RAM disk. The autoexec.bat file is then started
automatically.
The FlashDisk menu opens:
Figure 221: FlashDisk menu
I A firmware downgrade is only possible via recovery flash.
Normal
A normal flash is performed.
During a normal flash operation, those areas of the EEPROM that
contain the active firmware are checked to see whether they are up to
date. If one of these areas is not up to date then the corresponding area
for the inactive firmware is updated if it is not already up to date.
iRMC S2/S3
365
Updating firmware images
Recovery _L
A recovery flash for firmware image 1 (low firmware image) is carried out.
In the case of a recovery flash, the flash is performed for all three areas
of firmware image 1 without any version check.
Recovery _U
A recovery flash for firmware image 2 (high firmware image) is carried out.
In the case of a recovery flash, the flash is performed for all three areas
of firmware image 2 without any version check.
Readme
The Readme file is opened.
Reboot
An iRMC S2/S3 warm start is performed.
English / German
Specify keyboard layout. German is set by default.
Ê Start the required update variant by clicking on the corresponding button.
During the firmware update, the console informs you about the progress of
the update operation. If an error occurs, the update operation is aborted. A
corresponding return code is reported (see page 370).
Ê Once the update operation has been completed, click on Exit, to close the
FlashDisk menu.
Ê Remove the USB memory stick from the managed server.
Ê Restart the managed server (e.g. with [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]).
366
iRMC S2/S3
Emergency flash
10.4
Emergency flash
If the iRMC S2/S3 firmware can no longer be executed, e.g. because the SDRs
are not compatible with the system, then you can use the emergency mode to
start the firmware running again. In emergency mode, the system automatically
branches to the bootloader and is the ready for the firmware update.
I Emergency mode is indicated by the error LED (global error LED) (rot)
and the identification LED (blue) flashing alternately.
To switch the managed server to emergency mode and then update the
iRMC S2/S3's firmware, proceed as follows:
Ê Disconnect the power supply connector.
Ê Insert the connector in the socket again with the Identify key held down.
The managed server is now in emergency mode.
Ê Boot the server to DOS and use the recovery flash procedure to update the
iRMC S2/S3’s firmware.
I If the firmware is not active then the boot operation may take up to 2
minutes to start. You can ignore the error message “iRMC S2/S3
Controller Error” which the BIOS outputs during this period.
iRMC S2/S3
367
Flash tools
10.5
Flash tools
I The tools WinFLIRMCS2, rFLIRMCS2 and sFLIRMCS2 differ from
flirmcs2 only in respect of the name and the environment in which they
are called. This means that the description below also applies to
WinFLIRMCS2, rFLIRMCS2 and sFLIRMCS2. Instead of “flirmcs2”, you
simply enter “WinFLRMCS2”, “rFLIRMCS2” or “sFLIRMCS2” as
appropriate.
Syntax
flirmcs2 {/v|/o [/4]|/s[<value>]}
flirmcs2 {<file1> [<file2>] [<file3>]
[/n /l[<logfile>] /d /e /4 /i]}
flirmcs2 {/h|/?}
Options
/v
Displays the current version of the command.
/o
Displays the current versions of both firmware images.
/s
Displays the value of the firmware selector.
/s <value>
Sets the value of the firmware selector. You use this option to define the
firmware image from which the firmware is started after a firmware reset.
368
0
Sets the selector to the firmware image with the most recent
firmware.
1
Sets the selector to firmware image 1.
2
Sets the selector to firmware image 2.
3
Sets the selector to the firmware image with the oldest firmware.
4
Sets the selector to the firmware image with the most recently
updated firmware.
5
Sets the selector to the firmware image with the firmware which
has not been updated for longest.
iRMC S2/S3
Flash tools
<file1> through <file3>
Specify one or more files to determine which updates are to be made:
The following files are to be selected:
boot<FW-Version>.bin
Updates the bootloader firmware.
dcod<FW-Version>.bin
Updates the runtime firmware.
<SDR-Version>.SDR
Updates the SDR.
I To update firmware image 2, you must also specify option /4 (see
below).
/4
Updating firmware image 2.
/l [<logfile>]
Outputs error messages to the specified log file. If no logfile is specified,
the output is directed to the flbmc.log file.
/n
No output on the console.
This option has priority over the /p and /d options.
/np
A rotating bar is shown in place of the percentage completion during the
flashing operation.
/d
Outputs additional debug information.
/e
Emulation mode (for debugging purposes only).
/i
Update the inactive firmware.
/h and /?
Outputs help information.
iRMC S2/S3
369
Flash tools
Return values
0
Firmware update was executed successfully.
1
Illegal or missing arguments.
3
PROM type not available
4
Communication with iRMC S2/S3 not possible.
5
Incorrect binary file.
8
Error accessing Keyboard Control Style interface (KCS).
9
Timeout during communication with the target EEPROM.
10 No buffer allocated.
12 Network node busy.
13 Timeout erasing EEPROM.
14 Timeout flashing EEPROM.
15 Error erasing EEPROM.
16 Error flashing EEPROM.
370
iRMC S2/S3
11
Remote installation of the
operating system via iRMC S2/S3
This chapter describes how you use the ServerView Installation Manager
(abbreviated to Installation Manager below) and the iRMC S2/S3 features
"Advanced Video Redirection (AVR)" and "Remote Storage" to install the
operating system on the administered server from the remote workstation.
The chapter discusses the following specific topics:
– General procedure for the remote installation of an operating system using
remote storage media.
– Booting the administered server from the remote workstation using
ServerView DVD 1 (Windows and Linux).
– Installing Windows from the remote workstation after configuration on the
administered server.
– Installing Linux from the remote workstation after configuration on the
managed server.
The description focuses primarily on the handling of the remote storage media.
It is assumed that readers are familiar with the Installation Manager functionality
(see the manual "ServerView Installation Manager").
I Prerequisites for the remote installation of the operating system via
iRMC S2/S3:
– The iRMC S2/S3’s LAN interface must be configured
(see page 41).
– The license key for the use of the iRMC S2/S3 functions “Advanced
Video Redirection (AVR)” and “Remote Storage” must be installed
(see page 167).
iRMC S2/S3
371
General procedure
11.1
Installing the operating system via
iRMC S2/S3 - general procedure
For the Installation Manager, the remote installation of the operating system via
iRMC S2/S3 represents a local configuration and installation of the operating
system on the administered server which you perform from the remote
workstation via the AVR window using remote storage media.
The following steps are required in order to perform an installation via the
Installation Manager:
1. Connect the storage medium (DVD 1 or Installation Manager boot image)
from which you want to boot as remote storage.
2. Boot and configure the managed server via DVD 1 or the Installation
Manager boot image.
3. Use the Installation Manager at the remote workstation to install the
operating system on the administered server.
4. Optimize mouse pointer synchronization in the AVR window (only necessary
under Linux).
Installing Windows without the Installation Manager using the Windows
installation CD/DVDs
You can perform a remote installation of Windows via Remote Storage either
using the Installation Manager or exclusively using the Windows installation
CD/DVDs. The two procedures correspond in terms of the handling of the
remote storage media.
However, you are advised to install Windows via the Installation Manager for the
following reasons:
– The Installation Manager itself identifies the required drivers and copies
these to the system.
– All the Installation Manager functions are available to you during installation.
This means that you can, for example, configure the entire system including
the server management settings.
– Installations without the Installation Manager have to be controlled via the
keyboard since the mouse cursor cannot be synchronized during the
installation process. In contrast, if you install using the Installation Manager
then all configuration and installation steps can be performed using the
mouse.
372
iRMC S2/S3
General procedure
– If you install without the Installation Manager then all the settings required
for mouse cursor synchronization must subsequently be performed
manually.
– Installation using the Installation Manager does not take significantly longer
than installation using the operating system CD/DVDs.
Installing Linux without the Installation Manager using the Linux
installation CD/DVD
If you know which drivers are required by the system then you can start the
Linux installation by booting from the Linux installation CD/DVD.
If the installation requires you to integrate drivers from the floppy disk then,
before starting the installation, you must set up a remote storage connection
– to the storage medium (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM or ISO image) from which you
want to boot and
– if necessary to storage medium for driver installation.
iRMC S2/S3
373
Remote Storage connections
11.2
Connecting a storage medium as remote
storage
Remote Storage makes a “virtual” drive available which is located elsewhere in
the network.
The source for the virtual drive can be:
– Physical drive or image file at the remote workstation. The image file may
also be on a network drive (with drive letter, e.g. “D:” for drive D).
– Image file provided centrally in the network by means of a remote storage
server.
I Parallel remote storage connections:
The following are possible concurrently:
– either up to two Remote Storage connections to virtual drives at the
remote workstation (if the connection is established over the AVR
Java applet)
or
– one Remote Storage connection to a Remote Storage server.
It is not possible to establish concurrent Remote Storage connections via
an applet and via the Remote Storage server.
I The Remote Storage page of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface allows you to
obtain information on the status of the current remote storage
connections (see page 312).
For detailed information on remote storage, see chapter "Remote Storage" on
page 111.
374
iRMC S2/S3
Remote Storage connections
Connecting a storage medium as remote storage at the remote storage
workstation
Proceed as follows at the remote workstation to establish the remote storage
connection:
Ê Log into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface with Remote Storage Enabled
permission (see page 136).
Ê Open the Advanced Video Redirection (AVR) page and start the AVR (see
page 302).
Ê Start “Remote Storage” in the AVR window (see page 114).
Ê Prepare the storage media for remote storage (see page 117):
– If installation is performed via the Installation Manager:
ServerView Suite DVD 1 or an Installation Manager boot image and
optionally a formatted USB memory stick as a status backup medium.
– If installation is performed from the vendor’s installation CD/DVD:
Windows or Linux installation CD/DVD and optional drivers.
I It is recommended that the ServerView Suite DVD 1 and the
operating system installation CD/DVD are stored in a folder as an
image file (ISO image) and that they are connected from there as
Remote Storage or provided via a Remote Storage server.
The prepared storage media are displayed in the Storage Devices dialog box.
iRMC S2/S3
375
Remote Storage connections
Figure 222: Storage Devices dialog box: ServerView Suite DVD 1
Ê Click Connect to connect the DVD ROM drive (DVD 1) or the Installation
Manager boot image as remote storage.
Connect the ISO image (image file) provided by the remote storage server
as remote storage
You can use an image file provided via the remote storage server for booting
from an Installation Manager boot image.
I Before it is possible to use a virtual drive provided via a remote storage
server, the remote storage server must be installed and started (see
section "Providing remote storage via a Remote Storage server" on
page 127).
To establish the connection to the remote storage server, proceed as follows at
the remote workstation:
Ê Log into the iRMC S2/S3 web interface with Remote Storage Enabled
permission (see page 136).
Ê Select the Remote Storage page.
Ê Establish the connection to the remote storage server (see page 314).
376
iRMC S2/S3
Booting from DVD 1
11.3
Booting the managed server from
ServerView Suite DVD 1 and configuring it
with the Installation Manager
Proceed as follows at the remote workstation:
Ê Use the iRMC S2/S3 web interface to start up the managed server or reboot
the server (see page 189). You can follow the progress of the boot process
in the AVR window.
During the managed server’s BIOS/TrustedCore/UEFI POST phase, remote
storage media are displayed as USB 2.0 devices. Remote Storage storage
media are represented by the following entries in the BIOS boot sequence:
– A (physical) floppy disk is represented by a separate entry
“FTS RemoteStorage FD-(USB 2.0)”.
– All other remote storage device types are represented by the shared
entry “CD-ROM DRIVE”.
I If a local CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive and a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM
drive connected as remote storage are both present at the
managed server then the managed server boots from the Remote
Storage CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive.
Ê Press [F2] while the server is booting.
Ê In the BIOS/TrustedCore/UEFI set-up, open the menu Boot in which you can
define the boot sequence.
Ê Specify Boot Priority=1 (highest priority) for the ServerView Suite DVD 1
which is connected as remote storage.
Ê Save your settings and exit the BIOS/TrustedCore/UEFI setup.
The managed server then boots from ServerView Suite DVD 1 which is
connected as remote storage.
I If the system does not boot from the remote storage medium
(ServerView Suite DVD 1 or Installation Manager boot image):
Ê Check whether the storage medium is displayed during the BIOS
POST phase and connect the storage medium as remote storage if
necessary.
Ê Make sure that the correct boot sequence is specified.
iRMC S2/S3
377
Booting from DVD 1
It takes about 5 minutes to boot from ServerView Suite DVD 1 via a remote
storage medium. The boot progress is indicated during the boot process. Once
the boot process has completed, the Installation Manager startup displays a
dialog box in which you are asked to select a medium for the status backup area
(status backup medium).
I Before you start to install the operating system, you should synchronize
the local mouse cursor and the cursor of the managed server in the AVR
window at the remote workstation. For more detailed information on
synchronizing the mouse cursor in the AVR window, see section
"Synchronizing the mouse pointer" on page 93.
Ê Choose Standard mode as the Installation Manager mode.
Ê Specify whether the configuration data is to be stored on a local replaceable
data medium or on a network medium:
I Please note that if you do not select any status backup option all the
configuration data is lost when you reboot.
Status backup medium
I The backup medium must not be write-protected.
A USB stick must already be connected to the USB port when
the system is booted. If you fail to do this and wish to save the
configuration file: Connect the USB stick now and reboot from
ServerView Suite DVD 1.
Ê Choose the option on local drive (floppy / USB stick).
Ê Select the corresponding drive in the box to the right of this option.
For more detailed information on creating Installation Manager
status disks, see the manual “ServerView Installation Manager”.
Connecting the status medium and/or the installation media via the network
Ê Set up the required shares for this purpose.
I If you are making a medium with a prepared configuration
file and/or an installation medium available via the network,
you have to choose this option. Depending on your
infrastructure, you can either obtain a temporary IP
address via DHCP or manually configure an IPv4 or IPv6
address for the current Installation Manager session.
Ê Start the Installation Manager by clicking Continue.
378
iRMC S2/S3
Booting from DVD 1
Starting local deployment
The Welcome screen appears when you start the Installation Manager:
Figure 223: Installation Manager - Welcome screen
Ê Click Deployment to start preparation of the local installation (deployment).
To prepare the installation, the Installation Manager wizards take you
through a sequence of configuration steps that gather specifications for
configuring the system and for subsequent unattended installation of the
operating system.
I Configure the local CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the managed server
as the installation source. You can then also make the Windows
installation CD/DVD available from the CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of
the remote workstation if you connect it to the managed server as
remote storage (see section "Installing Windows on the managed
server after configuration" on page 380).
Once you have completed configuration with the Installation Manager, the
Installation Info dialog page for the Windows installation (see page 380) or for
the Linux installation (see page 383) is displayed. This allows you to start the
installation process.
iRMC S2/S3
379
Installing the operating system
11.4
Installing the operating system on the
managed server after configuration
Once you have completed configuration, you should install the operating system
on the managed server.
11.4.1 Installing Windows on the managed server after
configuration
After configuration has been completed, the Installation Manager displays the
following dialog page:
Figure 224: Installation Manager - Installation Info page
380
iRMC S2/S3
Installing the operating system
If you have configured the local CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the managed
server as the installation source, proceed as follows at the remote workstation:
Ê Clear your currently active remote storage connections. For more detailed
information on clearing remote storage connections, see page 125.
Ê Remove ServerView Suite DVD 1 from the DVD ROM drive at the remote
workstation.
Ê Insert the Windows installation CD/DVD in this DVD ROM drive.
I
Close the application if autostart is active.
Ê Connect the CD ROM/DVD ROM drive containing the Windows installation
CD/DVD as remote storage (see page 121).
Ê
In the Installation Info page of the Installation Manager, click Start installation.
All the installation files are copied to the managed server.
The Installation Manager opens a confirmation dialog page when the copy
operation is complete and prompts you to remove all the storage media from
the removable media drives before the managed server is rebooted.
I Before rebooting the system, you must in particular shut down all
current remote storage connections.
Ê To shut down all current remote storage connections, proceed as follows:
Ê Start “Remote Storage” (see page 114).
The Storage Devices dialog box is displayed with the currently connected
storage devices and a “Safe Remove” indication.
Ê “Safely remove” the storage device, i.e. ensure that no more
applications/programs are accessing the storage media.
Ê Click on Disconnect... to remove all the remote storage connections.
Ê On the confirmation dialog page, click Ok to reboot the managed server.
Once the managed server has rebooted, you can monitor the entire installation
by means of the AVR.
iRMC S2/S3
381
Installing the operating system
I For a Windows installation from the Windows installation CD/DVD:
To ensure perfect mouse cursor synchronization, you must adapt the
following settings at the managed server once the operating system has
been installed:
– Speed of the mouse pointer
– Hardware acceleration
For information on how to do this, see section "Managed Windows
server: Adjusting the settings for synchronization of the mouse pointers"
on page 95.
If Windows is installed using the Installation Manager, problem-free
synchronization of the mouse pointers is automatically ensured.
382
iRMC S2/S3
Installing the operating system
11.4.2 Installing Linux on the managed server after
configuration
I The mouse can be used but not synchronized during Linux installation.
I Whenever you change a remote storage medium, you must remove the
remote storage connection for the currently connected medium and then
connect the new medium as remote storage.
After configuration has been completed, the Installation Manager displays the
following dialog page:
Figure 225: Installation Manager - Installation Info
If you have configured the local CD ROM/DVD ROM drive of the managed
server as the installation source, proceed as follows at the remote workstation:
iRMC S2/S3
383
Installing the operating system
Ê Clear your currently active remote storage connections. For more detailed
information on clearing remote storage connections, see page 125.
Ê Remove ServerView Suite DVD 1 from the
DVD ROM drive at the remote workstation.
Ê Insert the Linux installation CD/DVD in this DVD ROM drive.
I
Close the application if autostart is active.
Ê Connect the CD ROM/DVD ROM drive containing the Linux installation
CD/DVD as remote storage (see page 121).
In the Installation Info page of the Installation Manager, click Start installation.
Ê
All the installation files are copied to the managed server. The Installation
Manager opens a confirmation dialog page when the copy operation is
complete and prompts you to remove all the storage media from the
removable media drives before the managed server is rebooted.
I Before rebooting the system, you must in particular shut down all
current remote storage connections.
Ê Before rebooting the system, shut down the current remote storage
connections.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Ê Start “Remote Storage” (see page 114).
The Storage Devices dialog box is displayed with the currently connected
storage devices and a “Safe Remove” indication.
Ê Click on Disconnect... to remove all the remote storage connections.
Ê “Safely remove” the storage device, i.e. ensure that no more
applications/programs are accessing the storage media.
Ê On the confirmation dialog page, click Ok to reboot the managed server.
Once the managed server has rebooted, you can monitor the entire installation
by means of the AVR.
I To ensure perfect mouse cursor synchronization, you must adapt the
required settings at the managed server once the operating system has
been installed. For information on how to do this, see section "Managed
Linux server: Adjusting the settings for synchronization of the mouse
pointers" on page 98.
384
iRMC S2/S3
12
Appendix
The appendix provides you with information about the following topics:
– "IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3" on page 385
–
"Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration" on
page 412
12.1
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the
iRMC S2/S3
This section describes a selection of OEM-specific IPMI commands supported
by the iRMC S2/S3.
12.1.1 Overview
The following OEM-specific IPMI commands are supported by the iRMC S2/S3:
●
SCCI-compliant Power On/Off commands
(SCCI: ServerView Common Command Interface)
– 0115 Get Power On Source
– 0116 Get Power Off Source
– 011C Set Power Off Inhibit
– 011D Get Power Off Inhibit
– 0120 Set Next Power On Time
●
SCCI-compliant communication commands
– 0205 System OS Shutdown Request
– 0206 System OS Shutdown Request and Reset
– 0208 Agent Connect Status
– 0209 Shutdown Request Canceled
●
SCCI-compliant signaling commands
– 1002 Write to System Display
iRMC S2/S3
385
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
Firmware-specific commands
●
– 2004 Set Firmware Selector
– 2005 Get Firmware Selector
– C019 Get Remote Storage Connection
– C01A Set Video Display on/off
●
BIOS-specific command
– F109 Get BIOS POST State
– F115 Get CPU Info
●
iRMC S2/S3-specific commands
– F510 Get System Status
– F512 Get EEPROM Version Info
– F542 Get HDD lightpath status (Component Status Signal Read)
– F543 Get SEL entry long text
– F545 Get SEL entry text
– F5B0 Set Identify LED
– F5B1 Get Identify LED
– F5B3 Get Error LED
– F5DF Set Nonvolatile Cfg Memory to Default Values
– F5E0 Set Configuration Space to Default Values
– F5F8 Delete User ID
386
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.2 Description of the IPMI OEM commands
The following sections describe the individual OEM-specific IPMI commands.
12.1.2.1 Description format
The OEM-specific IPMI commands contained in this chapter are described in
the format used by the IPMI standard for describing IPMI commands.
The IPMI standard describes the IPMI commands using command tables which
list the input and output parameters for each command.
You can find information on the IPMI standards on the Internet under:
http://developer.intel.com/design/servers/ipmi/index.htm
iRMC S2/S3
387
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.2.2 SCCI-compliant Power On/Off commands
01 15 - Get Power On Source
This command returns the reason for the most recent Power On. The possible
reasons are listed below.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
01
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
15
388
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
01
1
Completion Code
2:4
Power on
Source
80 28 00
4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
3
01
Data Length
4
Power on Source: Cause of last power on
Description
0x00
Software or command
0x01
Power switch (on the front panel or keyboard)
0x02
Automatic restart after power failure
0x03
Clock or timer (hardware RTC or software timer)
0x04
Automatic restart after fan failure shutdown
0x05
Automatic restart after critical temperature shutdown
0x08
Reboot after watchdog timeout
0x09
Remote on (modem RI line, SCSI termination power, LAN, chip card
reader...)
0x0C
Reboot after a CPU error
0x15
Reboot by hardware reset
0x16
Reboot after warm start
0x1A
Powered on by a PCI Bus Power Management Event
0x1D
Powered on by remote control via remote manager
0x1E
Reboot/reset by remote control via remote manager
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
01 16 - Get Power Off Source
This command returns the reason for the most recent Power Off. The possible
reasons are listed below.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
01
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
4
16
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
01
1
Completion Code
2:4
Power off
Source
80 28 00
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
3
01
Data Length
4
Power off Source:
Cause of last power off
Description
0x00
Software (SWOFF, power off by command)
0x01
Power switch (on the front panel or keyboard)
0x02
AC power fail
0x03
Clock or timer (hardware RTC or software timer)
0x04
Fan failure
0x05
Critical temperature
0x08
Final power-off after repeated watchdog timeouts
0x0C
Final power-off after repeated CPU errors
0x1D
Powered off by remote control via remote manager
iRMC S2/S3
389
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
01 1C - Set Power Off Inhibit
This command sets the Power Off Inhibit flag, which temporarily suppresses any
unfounded attempt to power down the server.
If the Power Off Inhibit flag is set, the firmware saves the cause of any attempt to
perform a “Power Off”, “Power Cycle” or restart of the server, but does not
perform the action. The cause of the most recent attempt to perform a “Power
Off”, “Power Cycle” or restart of the server is always saved at any given time.
The stored action is only performed when the Power Off Inhibit flag is reset.
The Power Off Inhibit flag is automatically reset after a power failure or when the
reset button is pressed.
The effect of the Power Off Inhibit flag is the same as that of the Dump flag used
when creating a main memory dump. In this case, the initiator must set the flag
before making the dump and reset it when the dump is complete.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group
-
01
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Command Specifier
5
00
Object ID
00 00 Value ID
8
01
9
Power Off Inhibit Flag: 0 no Inhibit, 1 Inhibit
-
BC
-
01
1
Completion Code
2:4
390
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
1C
6:7
Response Data
80 28 00
4
Data Length
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
01 1D - Get Power Off Inhibit
This command gets the value of the Power Off Inhibit flag.
For further details on the Power Off Inhibit flag, see the description of
"01 1C - Set Power Off Inhibit" on page 390
Request Data
-
B8
NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group
-
01
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
1D
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
01
1
Completion Code
2:4
iRMC S2/S3
80 28 00
4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
5
01 Response Data Length
6
Power Off Inhibit Flag: 0 no Inhibit, 1 Inhibit
391
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
01 20 - Set Next Power On Time
This command switches on a system at the given time independent of the stored
On/Off times in the Configuration Space.
I The command takes effect only once.
You cancel a “Power On” time previously set with a 01 20 command by
specifying the “Power On” time “0” in a subsequent 01 20 command.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
01
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
4
20
Command Specifier
5
00
Object ID
6:7
8
9:12
Response Data
80 28 00
00 00 Value ID
04
Data Length
Time (LSB first) (see below)
-
BC
-
01
1
Completion Code
2:4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Time (LSB first)
Time (UNIX-specific format) when the system switches on again. Time is
NOT stored in non-volatile memory. Resolution is 1 minute. After the
system has switched on, Time is set to 0 internally.
If Time == 0, the system is not switched on.
392
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.2.3 SCCI-compliant communication commands
I Die SCCI-compliant communication commands require that the Agent
Service is running under the OS. To execute the commands, the
iRMC S2/S3 communicates with Agent which finally performs the action.
02 05 - System OS Shutdown Request
This command initiates shutdown of the server’s operating system.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
02
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
80 28 00
4
05
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
02
1
Completion Code
2:4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
02 06 - System OS Shutdown Request and Reset
This command initiates the shutdown of the server’s operating system and
subsequently restarts the system.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
02
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
06
-
BC
-
02
1
Completion Code
2:4
iRMC S2/S3
80 28 00
4
Command Specifier
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
393
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
02 08 - Agent Connect Status
This command checks whether the agent is active.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
02
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
80 28 00
4
08
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
02
1
Completion Code
2:4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
5
01
6
Connect Status:
00 = Connection lost, agent not connected.
01 = Connection re-established, agent connected.
Data Length
02 09 Shutdown Request Cancelled
This command cancels a shutdown request that has been issued.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
02
Cmd : Command Group Communication
1:3
Response Data
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
4
09
-
BC
-
02
1
Completion Code
2:4
394
80 28 00
Command Specifier
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.2.4 SCCI-compliant signaling command
10 02 - Write to System Display
This command is used to write characters to the LocalView display (if
connected).
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
10
Cmd : Command Group Fan Test
1:3
5
Object Index: : Line on Display to write on.
Command Specifier
Value ID (not used)
8
Length Number of characters to write, incremented by
one. (The string need not be null-terminated; characters
exceeding the length of a display line are truncated.)
9
Attribute:
0 = Write String left aligned.
1 = Write String centered.
10:10+n
Characters to write to the display; string need not be nullterminated.
-
BC
-
10
1
Completion Code
2:4
iRMC S2/S3
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
02
6:7
Response Data
80 28 00
4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
395
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.2.5 Firmware-specific commands
20 04 - Set Firmware Selector
This command configures the firmware image of the iRMC S2/S3 which is to be
active after a firmware reset.
Request Data
Response Data
396
-
20
NetFnlLUN: Firmware
-
04
CMD : Command Group Firmware
1
Selector:
0 = Auto (Select firmware image with highest firmware
version.)
1 = low firmware image
2 = high firmware image
3 = Auto oldest version (Select firmware image with oldest
firmware version.)
4 = MRP (Select most recently programmed firmware.)
5 = LRP (Select least recently programmed firmware.)
-
24
-
04
1
Completion Code
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
20 05 - Get Firmware Selector
This command returns the current firmware selector setting.
Request Data
Response Data
iRMC S2/S3
-
20
NetFnlLUN: Firmware
-
05
CMD : Command Group Firmware
-
24
-
05
1
Completion Code
2
Next Boot Selector:
0 = Auto (Select EEPROM with highest firmware version.)
1 = low EEPROM
2 = high EEPROM
3 = Auto oldest version (Select EEPROM oldest firmware
version.)
4 = MRP (Select most recently programmed firmware.)
5 = LRP (Select least recently programmed firmware.)
3
Running Selector; tells which firmware is currently running:
1 = low EEPROM
2 = high EEPROM
397
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
C0 19 - Get Remote Storage Connection or Status
Depending on the parameters passed, this command returns information on
– whether any Remote Storage connections are available,
– the status and type of any Remote Storage connection(s).
If Request Data 1 is set to “1”, the command returns information as to whether
storage media are connected as Remote Storage.
Request Data
Response Data
398
-
C0
NetFnlLUN: OEM
CMD : Command Group Firmware
-
19
1
01
2
00
3
00
-
C4
-
19
1
Completion Code
2
01
3
00: No
01: Yes, connected
4
00
5
00
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
If Request Data 1 is set to “2”, the command returns information on the status and
type of any Remote Storage connection(s).
Request Data
Response Data
-
C0
NetFnlLUN: OEM
CMD : Command Group Firmware
-
19
1
02
2
00
3
00 = Connection 0
01 = Connection 2
-
C4
-
19
1
Completion Code
2
02
3
00
4
00
5
00 = Invalid / unknown
01 = idle
02 = Connection Attempt pending
03 = Connected
04 = Connection Attempts retries exhausted / failed
05 = Connection lost
06 = Disconnect pending
6
00 = Invalid / unknown
01 = Storage Server / IPMI
02 = Applet
03 = None / Not connected
iRMC S2/S3
399
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
C0 1A - Set Video Display On/Off
This command allows you to switch the local console on or off.
Request Data
Response Data
-
C0
NetFnlLUN: OEM
-
1A
Cmd : Command Group Fan Test
1
00 = Set Video Display On
01 = Set Video display Off
-
C4
-
1A
1
Completion Code
12.1.2.6 BIOS-specific commands
F1 09 - Get BIOS POST State
This command provides information whether BIOS is in POST.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F1
Cmd : Command Group BIOS
1:3
Response Data
09
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
F1
1
Completion Code
2:4
5
400
80 28 00
4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
[7:1] - reserved
[0] - BIOS POST State : 0 = BIOS is not in POST
1 = BIOS is in POST
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F1 15 - Get CPU Info
This command returns CPU-internal information. The iRMC S2/S3 gets this
information from the BIOS during the POST phase.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F1
Cmd : Command Group BIOS
1:3
4
Response Data
15
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
Command Specifier
5
Socket Number (0-based) of the CPU
-
BC
-
F1
1
Completion Code:
01 = Unpopulated CPU Socket
2:4
80 28 00
5:6
CPU ID, LS Byte first
7
8
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
Platform ID
Brand ID
9:10
Maximal Core Speed of the CPU [MHz], LS Byte first
11:12
Intel Qickpath Interconnect in Mega Transactions per
second, LS Byte first
13
iRMC S2/S3
80 28 00
T-Control Offset
14
T-Diode Offset
15
CPU data Spare
16:17
Record ID CPU Info SDR, LS Byte first
18:19
Record ID Fan Control SDR, LS Byte first
20:21
CPU ID High Word, LS Byte first (0 if none)
401
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
12.1.2.7 iRMC S2/S3-specific commands
F5 10 - Get System Status
This command returns a variety of internal information on the system such as
the power state, error status, etc.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group Memory
1:3
4
5:8
Response Data
80 28 00
10
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
Timestamp
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
5
System Status (For details see below.)
6
Signaling (For details see below.)
7
Notifications (For details see below.)
8
POST Code
I The Timestamp is only relevant for evaluating the Notifications Byte.
System Status
Bit 7 - System ON
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 - SEL entries available
Bit 3 Bit 2 - Watchdog active
Bit 1 - Agent connected
Bit 0 - Post State
402
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
Signaling
Bit 7 - Localize LED
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 - CSS LED
Bit 2 - CSS LED
Bit 1 - Global Error LED
Bit 0 - Global Error LED
Notifications
Bit 7 - SEL Modified (New SEL Entry)
Bit 6 - SEL Modified (SEL Cleared)
Bit 5 -
SDR Modified
Bit 4 - Nonvolatile IPMI Variable Modified
Bit 3 - ConfigSpace Modified
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 - New Output on LocalView display
iRMC S2/S3
403
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 12 - Get EEPROM Version Info
This command returns information on the current versions (bootloader,
firmware and SDR) stored in the EEPROM(s).
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group Memory
1:3
4
Response Data
12
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
5
EEPROM# 00=EEPROM 1; 01=EEPROM 2
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
5
80 28 00
Status
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
00=Checksum Error Runtime FW, 01=OK
6
Major FW Revision
Binary coded
7
Minor FW Revision
BCD coded
8:10
Aux. FW Revision
Binary coded (major/minor/res.)
11
Major FW Revision
ASCII coded letter
12
Major SDRR Revision
BCD coded
13
Minor SDRR Revision
BCD coded
14
SDRR Revision Char.
ASCII coded letter
15
SDRR-ID
LSB binary coded
16
SDRR-ID
MSB binary coded
17
Major Booter Revision
Binary coded
18
Major Booter Revision
BCD coded
19:20
404
80 28 00
Aux. Booter Revision
Binary coded (major/minor)
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 42 - Get HDD lightpath status (Component Status Signal Read)
This command returns information on the state of a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) slot.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group iRMC
1:3
Response Data
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
42
5
Entity ID (Table 37-12 of IPMI 1.5 Spec.) of Component
whose Status Signal is to be read.
6
Entity Instance (0-based) of Component whose Status
Signal is to be read.
7
Sensor Type (Table 36-3 of IPMISpec.) of the Sensor which
reports the Status of the Component to which the Status
Signal is associated.
(8)
Option (optional)
Bit 7:2 - Reserved
Bit 1
:Completion Code 0x02 suppressed
Bit 0
- 1 : Return ID String of Component Status Sensor
Command Specifier
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code:
01= Status Signal not available
02 = Component not present
2:4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
5
Signal Status:
00 = ok
01 = Identify
02 = Prefailure Warning
03 = Failure
6
CSS and Physical LED available:
Bit 6:0 - 0= No physical LED available
Bit 6:0 > 00 = Physical LED available, Single or Multiple
Color, Code
Bit 7 = 0: No CSS Component
Bit 7 = 1: CSS Component
(7)
(8 .. m)
iRMC S2/S3
80 28 00
4
Length of ID String of Component Status Sensor
(only present if Bit 0 in Request Byte 8 is set)
Length of ID String of Component Status Sensor in ASCII
chasracters
(only present if Bit 0 in Request Byte 8 is set)
405
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 43 - Get SEL entry long text
This command translates a given SEL entry into long text.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFn|LUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group iRMC
1:3
4
5:6
Response Data
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
43
Command Specifier
Record ID
of SEL record, LS Byte first
0x0000: get first record
0xFFFF: get last record
7
Offset
in response SEL text
8
MaxResponseDataSize
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code:
2:4
80 28 00
5:6
Next Record ID
7:8
Actual Record ID
9
10:13
14
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
Record type
Timestamp
Severity:
Bit 7:
Bit 6-4:
Bit 3-0:
15
406
size of Converted SEL data
(16:n) in response
Data length
0 = No CSS component
1 = CSS component
000 = INFORMATIONAL
001 = MINOR
010 = MAJOR
011 = CRITICAL
1xx = Unknown’
reserved, read as 0000
of the whole text
16:n
Converted SEL data
n+1
String Terminator
requested part
(n = 16 + MaxResponseDataSize - 1)
trailing '\0' character
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 45 - Get SEL Entry Text
This command translates a given System Event Log SEL entry into ASCII text.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group iRMC
1:3
4
5:6
Response Data
80 28 00
45
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
Command Specifier
Record ID of SDR, LS Byte first
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
80 28 00
5:6
Next Record ID
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS Byte first
7:8
Actual Record ID
9
Record type
10:13
Timestamp
14
Severity:
Bit 7:
Bit 6-4:
Bit 3-0:
15
16:35
iRMC S2/S3
0 = No CSS component
1 = CSS component
000 = INFORMATIONAL
001 = MINOR
010 = MAJOR
011 = CRITICAL
1xx = Unknown’
reserved, read as 0000
Data length
Converted SEL data
407
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 B0 - Set Identify LED
This command allows you to switch the Identify LED (blue) of the server on and
off. In addition, you can set and read the GPIOs that are directly connected to
the Identify LED.
I You can also switch the Identify LED on and off using the Identify switch
on the server.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group BMC
1:3
Response Data
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
4
B0
5
Identify LED:
0: Identify LED off
1: Identify LED on
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
Command Specifier
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
F5 B1 - Get Identify LED
This command returns information on the status of the Identify LED (blue) of the
server.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group BMC
1:3
Response Data
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
4
B1
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
5
408
80 28 00
Command Specifier
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
State of Identify LED (only bit 0 is relevant)
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 B3 - Get Error LED
This command returns information on the status of the server’s Global Error
LED (red) and CSS LED (yellow). The Global Error LED indicates the most
serious error status of the components. The CSS LED indicates, whether the
customer himself can rpair the fault.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group BMC
1:3
Response Data
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
4
B3
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
5
Command Specifier
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
State of Error LED:
0 : CSS off / GEL off
1 : CSS off / GEL on
2 : CSS off / GEL blink
3 : CSS on / GEL off
4 : CSS on / GEL on
5 : CSS on / GEL blink
6 : CSS blink / GEL off
7 : CSS blink / GEL on
8 : CSS blink / GEL blink
iRMC S2/S3
409
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 DF - Reset Nonvolatile Cfg Variables to Default
This command forces all non-volatile IPMI settings to be set to default values.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group BMC
1:3
4
5:8
Response Data
80 28 00
DF
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
43 4C 52 AA = ’CLR’0xaa: Security Code
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
F5 E0 - Reset ConfigSpace variables to default
This command forces all Configuration Space variables to be set to default
values.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group BMC
1:3
4
5:8
Response Data
E0
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
43 4C 52 AA = ’CLR’0xaa: Security Code
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
410
80 28 00
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
iRMC S2/S3
IPMI OEM Commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
F5 F8 - Delete User ID
The system supports up to 16 users. This command allows individual
iRMC S2/S3 users to be deleted.
V CAUTION!
The system can no longer be managed if all iRMC S2/S3 users are
deleted.
Request Data
-
B8
NetFnlLUN: OEM/Group
-
F5
Cmd : Command Group BMC
1:3
4
5:8
Response Data
F8
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
Command Specifier
User ID (1-16)
-
BC
-
F5
1
Completion Code
2:4
iRMC S2/S3
80 28 00
80 28 00
IANA-Enterprise-Number FTS, LS byte first
411
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and
scripted configuration
This section provides information on the following topics:
– How to use an SCCI (ServerView Common Command Interface) compliant
interface for configuring the iRMC S2/S3.
– Scripted configuration of the iRMC S2/S3
12.2.1 iRMC S2/S3 configuration data
I Please note that the interface described below is mainly for remote
configuration and is not an SCCI implementation. It only uses the SCCI
command and configuration definitions and the SCCI file format.
12.2.1.1 Overview
The iRMC S2/S3 stores internal configuration data in two separate sections of
its NVRAM (Non-volatile RAM):
– FTS-specific ConfigSpace data, which is addressed by the firmware via a
fixed internal description table.
– Original, manufacturer-specific NVCFG data, which is accessed by offset
definitions.
Some configuration data from the original NVCFG data is internally mapped by
the firmware to be accessible via ConfigSpace access methods. For instance,
DNS servers and DNS configuration of the iRMC S2/S3 can be accessed both
via IPMI OEM LAN configuration parameters and via ConfigSpace. Both
methods access the same low level data structures in the original NVCFG area.
Non-iRMC S2/S3-specific ServerView software components (e.g. the
ServerView Agents or the Server Configuration Manager) in some cases also
map standard IPMI related commands and configuration items, such as
standard IPMI user configuration or IPv4 network configuration. This
implements an abstraction level between the IPMI BMC layer and higher
software levels.
412
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
The SCCI is a generic application programming interface (API) defined by
Fujitsu for different Server Management Controller hardware as well as Server
Management software (e.g. ServerView Agents). It can be easily extended to
cover new commands or new configuration items. For an architectural overview
of the SCCI, see the online help of the ServerView agents.
Starting with iRMC S2 firmware 5.20A (IPv6 version), the iRMC S2/S3 supports
remote configuration and limited scripting via the /config URL in the
iRMC S2/S3.
Benefits of remote iRMC S2/S3 configuration via web-based access
Remote configuration of the iRMC S2/S3 via web-based access provides the
following benefits:
– Uses HTTP POST operation for uploading files onto the iRMC S2/S3. No
special tool is required. Any generic tool or scripting environments
supporting authenticated HTTP POST operations can be used. Sample
scripts can be found on the ServerView Suite DVD 1.
– Uses built-in authentication and authorization methods of the iRMC S2/S3
Web server.
– Supports HTTP 1.1 Basic and Digest authentication based on RFC 2617
with local iRMC S2/S3 user accounts.
– Features optional built-in strong encryption with standard HTTPS-based
access.
– Can be used with global user accounts (managed by an LDAP directory
service) and HTTP 1.1 Basic authentication.
I If HTTP 1.1 Basic authentication is used, it is recommended that, for
encryption and confidentiality reasons, you use the HTTPS protocol
to protect the username/password combination.
– Uses a configuration file format that is based on XML. You have the option
to edit the file manually, or to export it from a reference installation or from
the Server Configuration Manager.
The configuration file can be re-used with other SCCI based installation
methods (e.g. Server Configuration Manager).
– Can be easily extended to new configuration items and new supported SCCI
commands.
iRMC S2/S3
413
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.1.2 SCCI file format
I The format of the XML configuration file (.pre) used is taken from the
setup configuration help file that is installed together with the ServerView
agents on Windows platforms. A copy of this description with
iRMC S2/S3-specific notes is shown below.
The configuration file is a based on XML syntax:
–
Each configuration setting consists of a simple XML fragment starting with
a "<CMD>" tag.
– The complete sequence of configuration settings is enclosed in a pair of tags
"<CMDSEQ> and </CMDSEQ>".
The following is an example of a typical command sequence comprising two
configuration settings:
<CMDSEQ>
<CMD Context="SCCI" OC="ConfigSpace" OE="3800" OI="0"
Type="SET">
<DATA Type="xsd::hexBinary" Len="1">04</DATA>
<CMD Context="SCCI" OC="ConfigSpace" OE="3801" OI="0"
Type="SET">
<DATA Type="xsd::hexBinary" Len="1">00</DATA> </CMD>
</CMDSEQ>
The Context parameter is used internally to select the provider of the operation.
Currently, SCCI is the only supported provider.
414
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
Parameters of SCCI provider-specific commands
The following SCCI-provider-specific commands are available:
Operation Code (OC)
Hex value or string specifying the command / operation code.
I The iRMC S2/S3 only supports a limited set of SCCI commands.
For a list of supported commands see table "SCCI commands
supported by the iRMC S2/S3" on page 420
Operation Code Extension (OE)
Hex value for extended operation code. Default: OE=0
For ConfigSpace Read-/Write operations, this value defines the
ConfigSpace ID.
Object Index (OI)
Hex value selecting an instance of an object. Default:OI=0"
Operation Code Type (Type)
For configuration settings, the values GET (read operation) and SET (write
operation) are supported. Default: Type=GET
I SET operations require data. For specifying the appropriate data
type, use the Data (DATA) parameter described below.
Cabinet Identifier (CA)
Allows you to select an extension cabinet and use its cabinet ID number.
I Do not use this parameter to request for the system cabinet!
Data (DATA)
If a SET parameter (write operation) is specified: Data type (Type
parameter), and, in some cases, data length (LEN parameter) are
required.
Currently, the following data types are supported:
– xsd::integer
Integer value
Example
<DATA Type="xsd::integer">1234</DATA>
iRMC S2/S3
415
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
– xsd::hexBinary
Stream of bytes. Each byte is coded in two ASCII characters. Use the
Len parameter as shown in the example below to specify the length
of the stream (i.e. the number of bytes).
The data type xsd::hexBinary can be used without any restriction.
Example
A stream of four bytes 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x04 will be coded as
the following ASCII stream:
<DATA Type="xsd::hexBinary" Len="4">0001020304</DATA>
– xsd::string
Normally used for the transfer of strings. Additionally, the string type
can be used for IPv4 addresses and MD5-based user passwords. In
this case, the string data is internally converted to the accepted target
format.
Transferring encrypted data
A Fujitsu-proprietary data encryption is supported for some sensitive
data such as user or service (LDAP/SMTP) access passwords, or the
AVR license key of the iRMC S2/S3. You can use the iRMC_PWD.exe
program for encrypting password data (see section "Generating
encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD.exe" on page 424).
Encrypted="1" must be set in the <DATA> tag to indicate that the
data to be written is encrypted.
Examples
Transferring the string "Hello World":
<DATA Type="xsd::string">Hello World</DATA>
Transferring a password as clear (readable) text:
<DATA Type="xsd::string">My Readable Password</DATA>
Transferring an encrypted password:
<DATA Type="xsd::string"
Encrypted="1">TpVlTJwCyHEIsC8tk24ci83JuR9l</DATA>
416
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
Transferring the IPv4 address "192.23.2.4"
<DATA Type="xsd::string">192.23.2.4</DATA>
V CAUTION!
The xsd::string data type is restricted to readable strings, IP
addresses and MD5-based user passwords.
For all other data, the xsd::hexbinary data type must be used!
I Do not directly specify the characters ä, ö, ü, etc. in strings
unless they are actually needed by the using application!
Both SCCI and the ConfigSpace interface do not store any
character encoding information. Thus, any non-US-ASCIIcharacters will be interpreted internally by the using application
and therefore should be avoided.
If you do actually need to specify special characters, make sure
that you edit and save your file in UTF-8 format including the
correct BOM.
Command Status (Status)
After the configuration settings are transferred, the Status contains the
result of the operation. If the operation has completed successfully, the
value 0 is returned.
I For a specification of all public configuration settings (ConfigSpace) see
the SCCI_CS.pdf file, which you will find in the Help folder of the
ServerView Agents installation package. Additionally, the SCCI_CS.pdf
file is distributed with the PRIMERGY Scripting Toolkit.I
iRMC S2/S3
417
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.1.3 Restrictions
All commands specified in the .pre file are normally executed sequentially. The
following are exemptions from this rule:
– To prevent broken network connectivity, commands for IPv4 and VLAN
network configuration are executed at the end of a command sequence.
– Currently, IPv6 configuration is limited to the configuration of the non-volatile
IPv6 configuration parameters.
As a workaround, you can proceed as follows:
1. Arrange your script as follows:
a) At the beginning of the script: Disable IPv6.
b) Configure IPv6 parameters.
c) At the end of the script: Enable IPv6
2. Submit the script from an IPv4 address.
– The SSL certificate and the related matching private key are executed at the
end of a command sequence. Both components must be present in the
same .pre file and are checked for matching each other.
– If a power management operation for the managed server or a reboot of the
iRMC S2/S3 is required or desired:
It is recommended (but not required) to run these commands in separate
command files. You can achieve this e.g. by splitting the configuration and
power management operations into separate tasks.
– Optional time delays between the execution of consecutive commands must
implemented outside the script.
For example, you can achieve this as follows:
1. Devide the script appropriately into separate scripts.
2. Use the functional range of the client to insert time delays between
sending the individual files.
418
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.1.4 Exporting / importing configuration data from / on the
iRMC S2/S3
The Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings page of the iRMC S2/S3 web interface
allows you to save (export) the current iRMC S2/S3 configuration data in a
configuration file (.pre). As well, you can import iRMC S2/S3 configuration data
from an existing configuration file (.pre), i.e. load configuration data onto the
iRMC S2/S3 (for details, see section "Save iRMC S2/S3 Firmware Settings Save firmware settings" on page 169.)
To import an iRMC S2/S3 configuration, you can alternatively send the
corresponding SCCI command file to the /config URI of the iRMC S2/S3 via the
HTTP POST operation.
iRMC S2/S3
419
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.2 Scripted configuration of the iRMC S2/S3
This section describes provides information on the following topics:
– SCCI commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3.
– Using various script languages for scripted configuration of the iRMC S2/S3.
– Generating encrypted passwords with the iRMC_PWD.exe program.
12.2.2.1 List of SCCI commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
The SCCI commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3 are shown in table 19:
SCCI OpCode SCCI Command String
Description
0xE002
ConfigSpace
ConfigSpace Write
0x0111
PowerOnCabinet
Power On the Server
0x0112
PowerOffCabinet
Power Off the Server
0x0113
PowerOffOnCabinet
Power Cycle the Server
0x0204
ResetServer
Hard Reset the Server
0x020C
0x0205
0x0206
RaiseNMI
Pulse the NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt)
RequestShutdownAndOff
Graceful Shutdown, requires running
Agent
RequestShutdownAndReset
Graceful Reboot, requires running Agent
0x0209
ShutdownRequestCancelled
Cancel a Shutdown Request
0x0203
ResetFirmware
Perform a BMC Reset
ConnectRemoteStorageServer
Connect or Disconnect a standalone
Remote Storage Server
0x0250
Table 19: SCCI commands supported by the iRMC S2/S3
420
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.2.2 Scripting with cURL
The open source command-line tool cURL allows you to transfer data specified
with URL syntax. You can download the latest version of the source code as well
as precompiled versions for different operating systems from http://curl.haxx.se/.
The following are some examples of how to use curl to send a configuration file
to the iRMC S2/S3.
I For details on the curl command line options please refer to the curl
documentation.
– HTTP Access with Basic Authentication (default) and the default
iRMC S2/S3 admin account:
curl --basic -u admin:admin --data @Config.pre
http://<iRMC S2/S3 IP address>/config
– HTTP Access with Digest Authentication and the default iRMC admin
account
curl --digest -u admin:admin --data @Config.pre
http://<iRMC S2/S3 IP address>/config
– HTTPS Access with no certificate check (-k) and Digest authentication and
the default iRMC admin account:
curl --digest -k -u admin:admin --data @Config.pre
https://<iRMC S2/S3 IP address>/config
– HTTPS Access with an LDAP user account.
Please note, that for LDAP users you have to specify Basic authentication
curl --basic -k -u LDAPuser:LDAPpassword --data @Config.pre
https://<iRMC S2/S3 IP address>/config
iRMC S2/S3
421
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.2.3 Scripting with Visual Basic (VB) Script
The following VB script sends a configuration file to the iRMC S2/S3:
IP_ADDRESS = "<iRMC S2/S3 IP address>"
USER_NAME = "admin"
PASSWORD
= "admin"
FILE_NAME
= ".\\ConfigFile.pre"
Const ForReading = 1
Set objFSO = CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject")
Set objFile = objFSO.OpenTextFile(FILE_NAME, ForReading)
' -------------------------------------------------------------On Error Resume Next
Set xmlHttp = CreateObject("Microsoft.XMLHTTP")
xmlHttp.Open "POST", "http://" & IP_ADDRESS & "/config", False,
USER_NAME, PASSWORD
xmlhttp.setRequestHeader "Content-Type", "application/x-wwwform-urlencoded"
xmlHttp.Send objFile.ReadAll
Wscript.Echo xmlhttp.responsexml.xml
422
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
12.2.2.4 Scripting with Python
#!/usr/bin/python3
import sys
import httplib2
from urllib.parse import urlencode
# ==============================================================
# iRMC
USER = 'admin'
PWD = 'admin'
IP_ADDR = '192.168.1.100'
# ==============================================================
h = httplib2.Http()
# Basic/Digest authentication
h.add_credentials(USER, PWD)
def doit(data,ausgabe=sys.stdout):
try:
resp, content = h.request("http://%s/config" % IP_ADDR,
"POST", data)
if resp['status'] == '200'
data = content.decode('utf-8')
print(data,file=ausgabe)
else:
print('STATUS:',resp['status'],file=ausgabe)
print(str(resp),file=ausgabe)
except Exception as err:
print('ERROR:',str(err),file=ausgabe)
print()
# Example 1 - send a configuration file to the iRMC S2/S3
try:
data = open('ConfigFile.pre').read()
doit(data)
except Exception as err:
print('ERROR:',str(err),file=ausgabe)
# Example 2 - Set Config Space Values
# 0x200 (ConfCabinetLocation) and
# 0x204 (ConfSystemContact) direct from the script
#
LocationContact = '''<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"
standalone="yes" ?>
iRMC S2/S3
423
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
<CMDSEQ>
<!-- ConfCabinetLocation -->
<CMD Context="SCCI" OC="ConfigSpace" OE="200" OI="0" >
<DATA Type="xsd::string">%s</DATA>
</CMD>
<!-- ConfSystemContact -->
<CMD Context="SCCI" OC="ConfigSpace" OE="204" OI="0" >
<DATA Type="xsd::string">%s</DATA>
</CMD>
</CMDSEQ>
'''
doit(LocationContact % ("Ostsee","Kiel"))
12.2.2.5 Generating encrypted passwords with iRMC_PWD.exe
The Fujitsu Technology Solutions iRMC password encryption and verification
Utility iRMC_PWD.exe is a Win32 program allowing you to generate encrypted
passwords for use with SCCI scripting. iRMC_PWD.exe can be used both to
encrypt a single password and to generate a SCCI batch file for scripted
configuration.
iRMC_PWD standard command line options
[-h] [-?]
This help.
[-v]
Verify an encrypted password string.
[-o] <oid>
The Object ID for the data to be encrypted.
[-u] <username>
Username for the given Object ID (optional).
[-p] <password>
Password for the given Object ID / / encrypted password string to be
verified.
[-x] <opCodeExt>
Opcode extension for the ConfigSpace data to encrypt.
424
iRMC S2/S3
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
[-p] <password>
Password for the given Object ID.
Default:1452 (ConfBMCAcctUserPassword)
Supported values:
1273 - ConfAlarmEmailSMTPAuthPassword
[-p] <password>
Password for the given Object ID.
Default: 1452 (ConfBMCAcctUserPassword)
Supported Values:
1452 - ConfBMCAcctUserPassword
1273 - ConfAlarmEmailSMTPAuthPassword
197A - ConfLdapiRMCgroupsUserPasswd
1980 - ConfBMCLicenseKey
iRMC_PWD command line output options
[-b]
Creates the output file as a WinSCU BATCH file.
[-f] <Output File>
Specify the output file name.
Default: iRMC_pwd.txt
Default in Batch mode: iRMC_pwd.pre
Example
You want to generate a .pre file that sets/changes the username to admin
and the password to SecretPassword for the (existing) user with the oid 2.
To achieve this, enter the following command:
iRMC_PWD -o 2 -u admin -p SecretPassword -b
iRMC_PWD will generate a .pre file with the contents shown in figure 226 on
page 426.
iRMC S2/S3
425
Configuring the iRMC S2/S3 via SCCI and scripted configuration
Figure 226: Contents of the generated .pre file
426
iRMC S2/S3
">